JP2018175159A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine which displays an operation-prompting image on a display device such that an expected effect can be produced while preventing the player from suffering disadvantage.SOLUTION: A slot machine comprises main control means, subcontrol means, reels, stop buttons, an acquired-token count display device, and an image display device. The main control means, when a predetermined combination (such as a pressing order) is won under a predetermined condition, displays information about the pressing order on the acquired-token count display. The subcontrol means: when a predetermined combination is won under a predetermined condition, displays a pressing-order image on the image display device; when the predetermined condition is satisfied, displays on the image display device the operation-prompting image prompting the rotation of the reels to be stopped; and when the operation-prompting image is displayed with the pressing-order image displayed on the image display device, superimposes the operation-prompting image on at least a part of the pressing-order image.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 66

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  A slot machine is known as one of gaming machines. The slot machine is configured to provide a game in which a game medium (a game medal or the like) is acquired by aligning a combination of predetermined symbols according to the lottery result of the combination by the operation of the player. Among such slot machines, in the sub AT machine (slot machine having a configuration in which the AT is controlled by the sub control means), during AT game, the navigation display (pushing operation) is performed on the image display device driven (controlled) by Although the display of the sequential image was displayed, the navigation display (the display of the information regarding the pressing order) was not displayed on the display (for example, the obtained number display) driven (controlled) by the main control means. Further, in the main AT machine (slot machine having a configuration in which the main control means controls the AT), the navigation display is displayed on the display driven by the main control means, but the image display device driven by the sub control means It was more difficult to grasp the corresponding push order than the navigation display displayed in. Therefore, in general, a display (display of an operation promoting image) prompting the user to stop the rotation of the reel on the image display device is not displayed during AT game (see, for example, Patent Document 1). In addition, even if the operation promotion image is displayed during AT game, it is displayed so as not to overlap with the pressing order image. In other words, the navigation display displayed on the image display device is prevented from being obscured (not to be disadvantageous to the player). Specifically, when the operation promotion image is displayed on the image display device during AT game, it is displayed in the corner of the image display device, and if the navigation display is displayed in a large size (displayed so as to stand out If it was), it was displayed small (it was displayed inconspicuously).

Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2017-046956

  In short, in the conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the expected effect can not be exhibited even when the operation promoting image is displayed on the image display device. For example, if the start lever is touched by mistake when going to the bathroom, the operation promotion image is displayed by the time it returns from the bathroom, but it is displayed small because it is displayed small in the corner of the image display device. I could not confirm from a distance. In other words, I could not realize that I had to hurry back to my seat.

  The present invention has been made in view of such problems, and it is desirable to display an operation promoting image on the image display device so that the expected effect can be exhibited while preventing the disadvantage of the player. To aim.

  In order to solve the above problems, the gaming machine according to the present invention comprises a main control means for controlling the progress of the game, a sub control means for controlling the execution of the effect, a plurality of reels with symbols, and a plurality of reels. There is a stop button, an operation order notification means, and an image display means, and the main control means operates the stop button in a predetermined operation order under a predetermined condition, and a predetermined symbol combination is made. The information regarding the predetermined operation order is displayed on the operation order notification means when the predetermined combination to be stopped and displayed is won, and the sub-control means is predetermined when the predetermined combination is won under the predetermined condition. Information relating to the operation sequence is displayed on the image display means, and when the predetermined conditions are satisfied, information prompting the user to stop the rotation of the reel is displayed on the image display means. Is displayed on the image display means, when displaying information prompting the user to stop the rotation of the reel, at least a portion of the information relating to a predetermined operation sequence is to rotate the reel. The information for prompting the user to stop is overlapped and displayed, and the information for stopping the rotation of the reel is characterized by repeating display / non-display.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the sub-control means is different from operating the stop button when displaying information prompting the user to stop the rotation of the reel on the image display means. It is preferable to hide information prompting the user to stop the rotation of the reel when a specific condition is satisfied.

  When the gaming machine according to the present invention is configured as described above, it is possible to display the operation promoting image on the image display device so as to exert the expected effect while preventing the disadvantage of the player.

It is a front view of a slot machine. It is a block diagram showing an outline of a function of a slot machine. It is a block diagram showing a control system in a slot machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the symbol array of the outer peripheral surface of a reel. It is an explanatory view showing combination of a part and a symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation of an operation means, and the timing of the action | operation of a reel. It is an explanatory view for explaining the assignment state of the number of steps of a stepping motor. It is an explanatory view showing a winning probability of a combination lottery table set for each gaming state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pushing order of the stop button allocated to the role. It is an explanatory view for explaining a table used for stop control of a reel. It is an explanatory view showing transition of a gaming state and an internal gaming state in the slot machine. It is an explanatory view for explaining an acquisition number display. It is an explanatory view for explaining the relation between a winning combination and an instruction number. It is an explanatory view for explaining an example of mask processing. It is an explanatory view for explaining a modification of mask processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of program start processing. It is a flow chart which shows a flow of setting change processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a power supply reset process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of control command set 1 process and control command set 2 process. It is a flow chart which shows a flow of game progress main processing. It is a flow chart which shows a flow of game medal management processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the front | former stage of a game medal insertion check process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the latter part of a game medal insertion check process. It is a flow chart which shows a flow of a number-of-accumulations 1 sheet addition processing and one game medal addition processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a part lottery process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of lottery determination processing. In the internal gaming state setting process, is a flowchart showing the determination of the internal gaming state and the processing in the internal gaming state 0, 5 and 7. In the internal gaming state setting process, is a flowchart showing processing in the previous stage of the internal gaming state 2 and the internal gaming state 3. In the internal gaming state setting process, is a flowchart showing a flow of the latter stage of the process in the internal gaming state 3. It is a flow chart which shows a flow of processing before reel rotation start. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a reel stop management process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the front | former stage of a game completion check process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the front | former stage of the game state transition process which comprises a game completion check process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the latter part of the game state transition process which comprises a game end check process. It is a flow chart which shows a flow of processing in internal gaming state 0 and 1 among game end check processing. It is a flow chart which shows a flow of processing in internal gaming state 2 among game end check processing. It is a flow chart which shows a flow of processing in internal gaming state 3 among game end check processing. It is a flow chart which shows a flow of processing in internal gaming state 4-7 among game end check processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of an interruption process and a power-off process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a control command transmission process and a soft random number update process. It is a flowchart of processing of the image control board at the time of power on reset. It is a time chart of starting and runaway monitoring. It is a flowchart when transmitting data from an auxiliary control board to an image control board. It is an explanatory view for explaining the flow of an effect command. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the sub main loop process performed by a sub control board. It is an explanatory view showing composition of an effect command. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between an effect, 5 system command, and 4 system command. FIG. 7 is an explanatory view showing a 0-system command and a 7-system command. It is an example of use of the storage area of video RAM. It is a data structure of image data. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the sub sub loop process performed by sub sub CPU of an image control board. It is a flowchart of command analysis processing. It is a flowchart of drawing command list creation processing. It is a flowchart of the drawing process performed by image control IC. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the image memorize | stored in image ROM. It is explanatory drawing which shows the transmission timing of the control command with respect to the operation timing of the start lever and stop button when alerting | reporting pushing order, and a production | presentation command. It is explanatory drawing which shows the transition of the screen corresponding to FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the transmission timing of the control command when the 1st stop is failed, and a presentation command. It is explanatory drawing which shows the transition of the screen corresponding to FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the transmission timing of the control command when a door is open in the middle of a game, and an effect command. FIG. 61 is an explanatory view showing the transition of the screen corresponding to FIG. 60; It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the modification of a sub sub loop process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the transmission timing of the control command at the time of displaying an operation promotion screen, and a production | presentation command. It is explanatory drawing which shows the transition of the screen corresponding to FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the transmission timing of the control command at the time of displaying an operation promotion screen (modification), and an effect command. FIG. 66 is an explanatory view showing the transition of the screen corresponding to FIG. 65; It is explanatory drawing which shows the transmission timing of the control command at the time of displaying an operation promotion screen and an error screen, and a production | presentation command. FIG. 67 is an explanatory view showing the transition of the screen corresponding to FIG. FIG. 67 is an explanatory view showing the transition of the screen corresponding to FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display position of the alerting image in an image display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the magnitude | size of an image display apparatus, and the magnitude | size of a warning image. It is an explanatory view showing the progress of the game and the display timing of each image. It is an explanatory view showing an effect screen according to a game situation. It is an explanatory view showing time spent when playing in the shortest time. It is an explanatory view showing the relation of the minimum game time and operation timing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the minimum game time and the display time of a warning image. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the minimum game time and the display time of a warning image. It is an explanatory view showing a demonstration screen in standby game. FIG. 18 is an explanatory view showing a modified example of the demonstration screen in the standby game. FIG. 18 is an explanatory view showing a modified example of the demonstration screen in the standby game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the completion | finish screen in the case of making it freeze, and the display timing of an alerting image. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display timing of the alerting image when an error generate | occur | produces in the last game of a special game. It is an explanatory view showing the case where an error occurs under the situation where the alerting image is displayed at the end of the special game. It is an explanatory view showing a case where supply of electric power stops under a situation where a warning image is displayed at the end of a special game. FIG. 17 is an explanatory view showing a case where the sub operation switch is operated in a situation where the alerting image is displayed at the end of the special game.

  Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the configuration of a slot machine 1 which is an example of a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, FIG. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 1, FIG. 2 is a block diagram schematically showing the functions of the slot machine 1, and FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing a control system in the slot machine 1. 4 is an explanatory view showing an example of a symbol arrangement on the outer peripheral surface of the reel, FIG. 5 is an explanatory view showing a combination of a part and a symbol, and FIG. 6 is a timing chart of operation of operation means and operation of reels 21a to 21c. FIG. 7 is an explanatory view showing FIG. 7 is an explanatory view for explaining an assignment state of the number of steps of the stepping motor, and FIG. 8 is an explanatory view showing a winning probability of a winning lottery table set for each gaming state. FIG. 9 is an explanatory view showing the pressing order of the stop buttons 33a to 33c assigned to the role, and FIG. 10 is a view for explaining a table used for stop control of the reels 21a to 21c. 11 is an explanatory view, FIG. 11 is an explanatory view showing a transition of the gaming state and the internal gaming state in the slot machine 1, FIG. 12 is an explanatory view for explaining an acquired number display 72, and FIG. It is an explanatory view for explaining the relation between a part and an instruction number. In the following description, “image” includes still images and moving images unless limited.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the slot machine 1 arranges a combination of predetermined symbols among predetermined symbols displayed on the three reels 21a to 21c on a predetermined line, to thereby obtain a predetermined number of game medals. Providing a game for acquiring a game, as shown in FIG. 2, a symbol display means 20 for displaying symbols by reels 21a to 21c, an operation means 30 for receiving an operation of a player, and a main player to control the game It is comprised from the control means 100, the presentation means 40 which performs the presentation with respect to a game, and the sub control means 200 which controls this presentation means 40. FIG.

(Main control means 100)
The main control means 100 is a means for overall control of the entire game including the progression and effects of the game in the slot machine 1 and controls the drive (rotation and stop) of the winning combination determination means 110 and the symbol display means 20 to draw the winning combination. Reel control means 120 for performing the game, prize determination means 130 for determining the symbol when the symbol display means 20 is stopped, payout control means 140 for controlling the payout of game medals at the time of winning, etc. The setting order of the setting value setting unit 150, the game state control unit 160 for controlling the progress and the state of the game, the freeze control unit 170 for performing execution control of the freeze effect, and the stop button 33a to 33c constituting the operation unit 30 Operation order determination means 175, external device (for example, to manage the slot machine 1 via the external concentrated terminal board 80 information about the game External signal transmission means 180 for outputting to a display device or the like for displaying the state of each slot machine 1, control command transmission means 185 for transmitting a control command from the main control means 100 to the sub control means 200, It is configured to have a second random number generation unit 190. As shown in FIG. 3, this main control means 100 is a main CPU (central processing unit) 102 that performs operations and the like, and random numbers for performing lottery of effects and lottery of effects (for example, freeze effects and the like) A random number generator 103 for generating the RAM, a RAM 104 for temporarily storing captured data etc. when the main CPU 102 performs various controls, and a ROM 105 for storing programs necessary for the progress of the game etc. An I / F circuit 106 for communicating with the sub control means 200 is mounted on the main control substrate 101, and these are connected by a bus 107 so as to be able to transmit and receive data. In the main control means 100, the main CPU 102 is configured to expand the game control program recorded in the ROM 105 to the RAM 104 and execute the game control program to control the game. The main CPU 102 has a register for storing numerical values and the like used for program execution. In the following description, processing using this register will be described. However, these processes are an example, and the main The register of the CPU 102 and the RAM 104 can be used as appropriate.

  A symbol display means 20 is electrically connected to the output side (right side in FIG. 2) of the main control means 100. The symbol display means 20 comprises three rotatable reels 21 (left reel 21a, middle reel 21b, right reel 21c) on which various symbols are drawn along the outer peripheral surface of a cylinder, and reel drive means 22 (left reel drive) Means 22a, middle reel drive means 22b, right reel drive means 22c), and reel position detection means 23 (left reel position detection means 23a, middle reel position detection means 23b, right reel position detection means 23c) It is done. Then, three reels 21a to 21c are arranged so that three symbols continuing in the vertical direction can be seen from the reel display window 11 formed on the front door 3 of the slot machine 1. Therefore, these left reel 21a, middle reel 21b and right reel 21c are arranged so that a total of nine symbols (symbols 90 to 98 shown in FIG. 1) can be seen from the reel display window 11 of the slot machine 1 There is.

  On each of the reels 21a to 21c, for example, as shown in FIG. 4, 20 symbols from 0 to 19 are displayed, and are variably displayed in the order of increasing numbers. In addition, the symbol shown in this FIG. 4 and its arrangement | positioning are examples. Further, as shown in FIG. 2, the reel drive means 22 (22a to 22c) is constituted by a stepping motor or the like, and is connected to the rotation center of each of the reels 21 (21a to 21c). It is controlled by the reel control means 120 of 100. Further, the reel position detecting means 23a to 23c are for determining the stop position of each of the reels 21a to 21c when determining the symbols displayed on the effective line, and the reel position detecting means 23a to 23c The detected value by 23c is read by the main control means 100 and processed by the prize determination means 130. Here, reel sensors are disposed above the respective reel drive means 22 (22a to 22c). The reel sensor detects a reference position of the reel 21 (21a to 21c), and is attached to a portion connecting the reel 21 (21a to 21c) and the reel driving unit 22 (22a to 22c). When the detected member (index) passes in front of the reel sensor, the reel sensor detects the index. As a result, each time the reels 21 (21a to 21c) make one rotation, each of the detected members can be detected by the reel sensor, and a reference position can be specified, and each reference position can be specified. The stop positions of the reels 21a to 21c can be determined. A photo sensor, a magnetic sensor, a touch sensor or the like can be used as the reel sensor.

  Further, nine back lamps 44 are disposed behind each of the nine symbols seen from the reel display window 11. By turning on the back lamp 44, each symbol can be highlighted. Alternatively, all the back lamps 44 may be turned on, the illuminance of the back lamps 44 on the line to be emphasized may be increased, and the illuminance of the other back lamps 44 not to be emphasized may be reduced. As described above, the reel 21 (21a to 21c) has a function as a variable display unit that variably displays a plurality of display areas (a total of 9 patterns visible from the reel display window 11) in which a plurality of symbols are displayed. Also, the back lamp 44 has a function as a display area effect means for effecting the display area of the variable display means. In addition, when notifying the pressing order to which the pressing order of the stop buttons 33a to 33c is assigned, such as a winning combination-A1 described later, as the effect, the back lamp 44 on the invalid line described later Alternatively, the back lights 44 on the plurality of invalid lines may be turned off one line at a time each time the stop buttons 33a to 33c are turned on or off.

  Further, the operation means 30 is electrically connected to the input side (the left side in FIG. 2) of the main control means 100, and the operation means 30 is a bet button 31 (one bet button 31a and MAX bet button 31b). , Start lever 32, stop button 33 (left stop button 33a, middle stop button 33b, right stop button 33c), checkout button 34, power switch 35, setting change key switch 36, and reset / setting switch 37 There is.

  The start lever 32 is a lever operated to start the reels 21a to 21c provided as the symbol display means 20, and has a function as the start means. The stop button 33 (33a to 33c) is a button operated by the player when stopping each of the rotating reels 21a to 21c, and has a function as a stopping means. In addition, the bet button 31 is a switch operated by a player to insert (bet a bet) stored medals ("credits" described later) into the slot machine 1, and the symbol combination line described later is activated by the operation. Be done. The medal insertion slot 51 shown in FIG. 1, like the bet button 31, is a portion into which a game medal is inserted to activate a symbol combination line, and the insertion of a game medal from the medal insertion slot 51 is This is included in the operation of the bet button 31. In the case where game medals have been inserted exceeding the number of bets that can be bet on one unit game, electronic information is made to the inside (game medium storage means 141) of the slot machine 1 within the range of the predetermined number. Are stored (for example, stored in the RAM 104) (hereinafter, simply referred to as "stored"). Further, the settlement button 34 is a button for paying out the game medals stored inside the slot machine 1 and the game medals bet. The power switch 35 is a switch for turning on / off the power of the slot machine 1. The setting change key switch 36 and the reset / setting switch 37 are used, for example, when changing the set value by the set value setting means 150 described later.

  In addition, on the input side of the main control means 100, two sensors (a first insertion sensor 61 and a second insertion sensor 62) for detecting game medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 51 and a game medal are paid out. A payout sensor 71 for detecting gaming medals paid out from the hopper device which is a device, a door switch 91 for detecting opening and closing of the front door 3, an opening and closing of a door of an area storing a setting change key switch 36 etc. The setting door switch 92 is connected. The detection results of the first and second insertion sensors 61 and 62 and the payout sensor 71 are processed by the payout control means 140, and the detection results of the door switch 91 and the setting change key switch 36 are processed by the setting value setting means 150. The first insertion sensor 61 is disposed on the upstream side of the flow path communicating with the hopper device from the medal insertion port 51, and the second insertion sensor 62 is disposed on the downstream side. Further, in the process of the game medals flowing down the flow path, the first and second insertion sensors 61 and 62 are arranged so as to simultaneously detect the game medals.

  In addition, on the output side of the main control means 100, a blocker 60, a hopper motor 70, an acquired number display 72 and an external concentrated terminal provided in a selector for determining the flow path of the game medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 51. A plate 80 is connected. Here, the blocker 60 has a function of guiding the medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 51 to the flow path for return during a period in which the game medal is not received. Further, the hopper motor 70 operates when paying out game medals from the hopper device. The operations of the blocker 60 and the hopper motor 70 are controlled by the payout control means 140.

(The winning combination determination means 110)
The winning combination determination means 110 acquires a first random number value from the random number generator 103 (in the following description, this random number generator 103 is also referred to as "first random number generation means") shown in FIG. The second random number value is acquired from the second random number generation unit 190 different from the unit 103, and the first random number value and the second random number value are processed by operation to generate a third random number value. It is configured to determine whether or not the winning combination has been won by the third random number value and the combination lottery table in which the winning probability of each of the plurality of combinations is defined corresponding to the possible range of the random value. (Hereinafter, data on the winning probability for each combination set in the combination lottery table is referred to as "probability data"). The method of determining the winning combination by the winning combination determining means 110 will be described later. Here, as a part of the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5, a special part, a winning combination and a re-playing combination are provided. When the winning combination determining means 110 wins a winning combination, the winning combination determining means 110 turns on a flag of the winning combination in a flag information storage means 111 described later. In this way, the winning combination determination means 110 determines the winning combination and at the time of fluctuating display of the display area of the variable display means, at least as the combination determination means and lottery means for determining the variable display content (stop symbol). It has a function.

  Here, the special part is a part that the game medal is not paid out when the combination of the symbols corresponding to the part is stopped (winning) on the effective line described later, but is shifted to the special gaming state, In the embodiment, BB1, BB2 and BB3 are provided as BB (big bonus). The BB is a role to shift to a BB game (a so-called game in which a feature continuous operating device related to a first-class special feature is operated) which is one of the special games. For example, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when three game medals are betted and a game is performed, a combination of symbols of special roles (BB1 to BB3) shown in FIG. When stopped (winning), it is configured to shift to BB game. Here, the BB game is a game in which RB games to be described later can be repeatedly performed until the payout number of game medals exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 334 BB1, 238 BB2 and 60 BB3). .

  The special role is not limited to this BB, and MB (middle bonus), RB (regular bonus), SB (single bonus), CB (challenge bonus) and the like may be provided. MB is a role to shift to one of the special games, MB game (a game in which a feature continuous operating device related to a second type special feature operates). This MB game is a game in which all the small winning combinations are won regardless of the lottery result, and can be repeatedly performed until the payout number of game medals exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 30). In addition, in this MB game, the reel control means 120 described later takes one frame from when the stop button 33 (33a to 33c) is pressed against at least one of the three reels 21a to 21c. It is determined that the rotation of the reels 21a to 21c is stopped within a minute. At this time, the number of game medals betted in the MB game may be set to be different (for example, two) from those in the non-MB game. In addition, RB is a role to shift to another RB game (so-called, a game in which a condition operation device related to a first-class special game is activated) which is another special game. This RB game is a game that can be repeatedly performed until a predetermined small winning combination is won twice with a high probability or a second winning. In addition, when the combination of the symbols of the SB is aligned on the activated line, an SB game is performed in which one bonus game in which a predetermined small winning combination is won with high probability is played. This SB is used as a role to control the gaming state There is also Further, when the combination of symbols of CB is aligned on the activated line, all winning combinations are won regardless of the lottery result, and the process is ended when the result of one game is obtained. In this CB game, the reel control unit 120, which will be described later, is within one frame from when the stop button 33 (33a to 33c) is pressed on at least one of the three reels 21a to 21c. It is determined to stop the rotation of the reels 21a to 21c.

  Further, the winning combination is a combination in which a predetermined number of game medals are paid out when the combination of the symbols is stopped and displayed on the effective line, and as shown in FIG. 5, according to the type of the winning combination. The combination of symbols corresponding to the role and the number of game medals to be paid out are set. In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, winning combinations 01 to 24 are set as winning combinations. Further, the term “replay” is a role in which the combination of the symbols of the replay role is stopped and displayed on the effective line, so that the number of inserted medals can be maintained and the game can be played again. In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5, replay players 01 to 08 are set. In the next game in which the combination of symbols of the replay role is stopped and displayed on the activated line, the game medal can be inserted from the medal insertion slot 51.

  The winning combination determining unit 110, as shown in FIG. 2, corresponds to a flag information storage unit 111 for storing lottery results and the like, and a winning combination determining unit 110, when it is won as a special combination, corresponds to an effective line described later. The special role carry-over means 112 holds the winning state until the combination of symbols to be displayed is stopped and displayed (until winning).

(Flag information storage means 111)
The flag information storage unit 111 receives a winning combination by the winning combination determination unit 110 (as will be described later, when the condition device search number of the winning combination is set in the condition device number buffer in the combination lottery process S5080). , The type of winning combination and its flag are turned on and stored. In a slot machine having a special part, the timing at which the information stored in the flag information storage unit 111 is erased (the timing when the winning flag is off) is different between the special part and the other parts. . That is, in the case of the special combination, the information stored in the flag information storage means 111 is erased on condition that the combination of symbols of the special combination is stopped and displayed on the effective line, and the combination of special combination symbols is valid If it is not stopped on the line, it will be carried over until the combination of the symbols is stopped on the effective line after the next game, but in the case of other roles, the combination of the symbols for that role is the effective line It is erased at the end of the game and is not carried over until the next game regardless of whether the stop display is performed on the upper side or not. In the slot machine 1 having the MB game, during the MB game, regardless of the lottery result of the winning combination determining means 110, it is possible to turn on the winning flag of the combination having all payouts except the special combination. However, when a replaying combination (replay) is won in the lottery result, the flag of the replaying combination may be turned on. As described above, the flag information storage unit 111 has a function as a determination combination storage unit that stores the combination determined by the winning combination determination unit 110.

(Special role carry over means 112)
The special part carry-over means 112 is won by the winning part determination means 110 and when the flag for the special part is set in the flag information storage means 111, the symbol of the selected special part is stopped and displayed on the effective line. If the combination of symbols of special characters is stopped and displayed on the effective line, the carryover of the special character ends (flag is lowered) until the winning combination is carried over (the flag is maintained). It should be noted that among the special roles, SB and CB, if the symbol can not be stopped and displayed in the won game, the flag is lowered (can not carry over to the next game). In addition, when a winning combination is won as a result of the lottery by the winning combination determination means 110 while carrying the special combination (when in the RT4 gaming state which is an internal middle game state described later), the special combination and the winning combination In the state in which the flag is set, it is possible to stop and display any combination of symbols of the winning flags depending on the stop mode.

(Reel control means 120)
The reel control means 120 controls the start and stop of the rotation of the reels 21a to 21c according to the timing when the start lever 32 and the stop buttons 33a to 33c of the operation means 30 are operated. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 6A, the reel control unit 120 rotates the reels 21a to 21c when the start lever 32 is operated at time t0, and then stops at time t1 to t3. Every time the buttons 33a to 33c are operated, the gaming state managed by the gaming state control means 160 described later, the result of the lottery by the winning combination determining means 110, and the stop button 33 (left stop button 33a, middle stop button The stop positions of the reels 21a to 21c corresponding to the operated stop buttons 33a to 33c are determined based on the timing when the right stop button 33c) is operated, and the reel drive means (stepping motor) 22a to 22c Controlling the drive of 22c to set each of the reels 21a to 21c at the determined position. Sealed cell. Thus, the reel control means 120 stops the reels 21a to 21c as the variable display means for fluctuating the display area in which a plurality of symbols are displayed, in response to the operation of the stop buttons 33a to 33c as the stop means. It has a function of the variable display control means.

  Here, on the reels 21a to 21c displayed in the reel display window 11 of the slot machine 1, symbol combination lines are provided. The "symbol combination line" is a line of symbols when the reels 21a to 21c are stopped, and is a line on which a combination of symbols is formed. For example, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, for 3 × 3 nine symbol stop positions 90 to 98 displayed in the reel display window 11, one each from the respective reels 21a to 21c. Design stop positions are selected and configured as a line connecting them.

  Furthermore, an effective line and an invalid line are set out of these symbol combination lines. In the “effective line”, in the present embodiment, when a combination of symbols corresponding to one of the combinations is stopped on the line, a line in which a player is determined to be a prize and a profit according to the combination is given. It is. On the other hand, "invalid line" is a line which is not set as an effective line among symbol combination lines, and even if a combination of symbols corresponding to any of the combinations is stopped on the line, the combination It is a line which does not perform the provision of the profit according to (the payout of the game medal, etc.). That is, an invalid line is a line which is not a formation object of a combination of symbols from the beginning. These valid lines and invalid lines may be set according to the number of game medals inserted by the player, or may be determined in advance. In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the symbol stop position 91 in the middle of the left reel 21a, the symbol stop position 94 in the middle of the middle reel 21b, and the middle symbol of the right reel 21c. A line L connecting the stop positions 97 is set as a valid line. The configuration of the symbol combination line is an example, and the present invention is not limited to this configuration.

  The stepping motor constituting each of the above-described reel drive means 22a to 22c has a four-phase coil (stator) which is excited by a drive pulse supplied from the main control means 100, although not particularly shown. . Then, two-phase excitation in which two phases are excited at the same time among four-phase coils and one-phase excitation in which one phase among four-phase coils is excited are alternately repeated 1 The rotor (rotor) is configured to rotate by the −2 phase excitation. In addition, a predetermined number of steps is determined for controlling the reels 21a to 21c in this stepping motor, and the number of steps is allocated to each symbol of the reels 21a to 21c to control stopping in one symbol unit. It is configured to

  Here, the assignment of the number of steps in the stepping motor (reel drive means 22a to 22c) included in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. In this stepping motor, for example, 336 steps (= 21 × 16) are set as the total number of steps, and the rotational speed in the constant speed state is 80 rpm. Further, in the slot machine 1, the reels 21a to 21c are within a predetermined time Ts (for example, 190 ms) from the time the stop buttons 33a to 33c are operated and within a range of at most five symbols from that time. It is configured to stop the rotation of.

  For example, when using the reel by which 21 symbols are arrange | positioned around as reels 21a-21c, 16 steps can be equally allocated with respect to each symbol. And, as described above, since the rotational speed of the stepping motor is 80 rpm, the control time per step is 2.23 ms. Then, assuming that the maximum number of steps is 5 at the time the stop buttons 33a to 33c are operated, the number of steps for 5 symbols is 80 steps (= 16 × 5), so the stop buttons 33a to 33c The time required for the corresponding reels 21a to 21c to stop after the operation of the above is 178.4 ms (= 2.23 × 80). In addition, depending on the operation timing of the stop buttons 33a to 33c, there is a possibility that the process of stopping may be performed delayed by one step, but even if this is taken into consideration, the operation is performed after the stop buttons 33a to 33c are operated. The time until the reels 21a to 21c stop is 180.63 ms (= 178.4 + 2.23) at maximum, and can be within 190 ms.

  However, as described above, twenty symbols are displayed around the reels 21a to 21c of the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, and the number of steps can not be evenly allocated to each symbol. In addition, since the number of steps to be assigned is increased by decreasing the number of symbols by one compared with the case of 21 pieces, when the assignment of the number of steps is biased, the time when the stop buttons 33a to 33c are operated If you try to stop at a maximum of 5 symbol points from there, there is a risk that it can not be stopped within 190 ms. Therefore, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, the quotient M (ie 16) and the remainder P (ie 16) when dividing the 336 steps set as the total number of steps by 20. Of the 20 symbols, P / 4 (ie, 4) symbols with M + 1 step (ie, 17 steps) allocated to any of the five consecutive symbol ranges, and M steps (ie, , (16 steps) are assigned to include (20-P) / 4 (i.e., 1) symbols. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 7, the number of steps is assigned to each symbol of the reels 21a to 21c so that the sequence of 17 steps, 17 steps, 17 steps, 16 steps and 17 steps is repeated four times. .

  By assigning the number of steps to each of the reels 21a to 21c in this manner, 4 pieces in which 17 steps are assigned and 1 step in which 16 steps are assigned in any consecutive 5 ranges of 20 symbols Therefore, the total number of steps in the range of five symbols is 84 steps (= 17 × 4 + 16), and the stop time can be contained within 190 ms.

  Further, as described above, the reel control means 120 of the slot machine 1 in which the special role is included in the role determined by the winning combination determination means 110 is elected as the special role, and the special role carry over means 112 carries the special role. In a played game, when winning in a winning combination or a re-playing combination, the operation of the reels 21a to 21c may be controlled to give priority to stopping those combinations on the activated line. it can. Specifically, when the replay player is elected, the combination of symbols of the replay player is always stopped and displayed on the effective line in priority to the other winning combinations. Further, with regard to the winning combination, the combination of symbols can be configured to be stopped and displayed on the activated line in preference to the special combination. The control for stopping such reels 21a to 21c is performed using a stop table for reel control as described later.

  In addition, the reel control unit 120 is configured to control the operation of the reels 21a to 21c such that the interval between the previous game and the next game is equal to or more than a predetermined time (minimum game time) T0. That is, as shown in FIG. 6A, when the next game is started after the minimum game time T0 has elapsed from when the start lever 32 is operated at time t0 and the reels 21a to 21c start to rotate ( When start lever 32 is operated again at time t5 later than time t4 when time T0 has elapsed from time t0), rotation of reels 21a to 21c is started according to the operation of start lever 32 (time t5 Start rotating the reels 21a to 21c). However, as shown in FIG. 6 (b), when the start lever 32 is operated at time t5 'before time t4 when the minimum game time T0 elapses, the reel control means 120 operates the start lever 32. At the time (time t5 '), the rotation of the reels 21a to 21c is not started, and the rotation of the reels 21a to 21c is started at the time (time t4) when the minimum game time T0 has elapsed. For example, 4.1 seconds is set as the minimum game time T0.

  Here, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the winning combination is constituted by 24 combinations of the winning combinations 01 to 24 as described above. The winning combinations 01 to 24 are configured such that the combinations of the respective symbols are different as shown in FIG. In FIG. 5, the symbols to be stopped on each of the left, middle and left reels are displayed in this order in square brackets (""), and the symbols separated by slashes (/) in one square bracket are , Indicates that each symbol constitutes the role. For example, in FIG. 5, the combination of symbols of the winning combination 02 is described as "Replay A / Replay B"-"Bell"-"Cherry", but this corresponds to "Replay A"-"Bell"-"Cherry" (The symbol of "Replay A" is stopped in the middle of left reel 21a, the symbol of "bell" is stopped in the middle of middle reel 21b, and the symbol of "cherry" is stopped in the middle of right reel 21c. " And "Replay B"-"Bell"-"Cherry" (The symbol of "Replay B" is stopped in the middle of left reel 21a, the symbol of "Bell" is stopped in the middle of middle reel 21b, and right reel 21c In the middle of the figure, it is shown that the "cherry" symbol is stopped.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a combination of a plurality of symbols may be associated with each combination (for example, winning combinations 02 to 10, 13 to 16, 20 to 24). Note that "any" shown as a symbol of the middle reel 21b of the winning combination 20 indicates that any of the symbols arranged on the middle reel 21b may be used.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 8, 17 winning combinations including these winning combinations 01 to 24 (configured to be duplicated) are assigned to the winning combinations 01 to 24. Yes (winning combination-A1 ~ winning combination-G). In FIG. 8, the bracket in the winning combination shows the winning combinations 01 to 24 assigned to the winning combination which is the winning combination. For example, when the winning combination -A1 is determined as the winning combination, the winning combination 01, It shows that the winning combination 07, the winning combination 13 and the winning combination 19 will be won in duplicate. The winning combination-G is a combination that is won when the above-described BB game is being executed, and all of the winning combinations 01-24 are winnings. As described above, in the present embodiment, in the winning combination including the winning combination, as described above, the winning combination is double winning, and any one of the winning combinations such as the winning combinations-C and D is single winning. The winning combination is also included.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 9A, among these winning combinations, the pressing order of the stop buttons 33a to 33c is assigned to the winning combinations -A1 to A6 and the winning combinations -B1 to B6. Hereinafter, the winning combinations-A1 to A6 and the winning combinations-B1 to B6 will be referred to as "push order bell". In addition, in the winning combinations-A1 to A6 and the winning combinations B1 to B6, the combination of the symbols of the combinations for which seven game medals are paid out (hereinafter referred to as "seven combinations") is stopped on the effective line. It is called "the order of pressing the correct answer" (in addition, the part from which one game medal is paid out is called "one part"). In FIG. 9, for example, when “left middle right” is operated as the first stop, the left stop button 33a is operated as the second stop, the middle stop button 33b is operated as the second stop, and the right stop button 33c is operated as the third stop. Is shown. Also, “left **” indicates that the left stop button 33a is operated as the first stop, but the second stop and the third stop indicate that the operation order of the middle stop button 33b and the right stop button 33c is arbitrary. ing.

  As described above, when each of the stop buttons 33a to 33c is operated, the reel control means 120 corresponds to the middle step of the reel display window 11 when the corresponding reels 21a to 21c are operated. It is configured to stop within 5 symbols including those in. As shown in FIG. 4, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the symbols of "bell" are arranged within 5 symbols in any of the left reel 21a to the right reel 21c. There is. That is, even if the stop buttons 33a to 33c are operated at any timing, it is possible to pull in the symbol of "bell" on the effective line and to make the stop display. Therefore, even if each of the reels 21a to 21c is at any rotational position, when the stop buttons 33a to 33c are operated, the reel control means 120 configures the winning combination 01 on the effective line. It is possible to stop any one of a plurality of combinations of symbols on the effective line. Similarly, the symbols of "Replay A" or "Replay B" are arranged such that the distance between each other is within 5 symbols in any of the left reel 21a to the right reel 21c. The same applies to the "cherry" symbol on the right reel 21c. Therefore, even if each of the reels 21a to 21c is at any rotational position, when the stop buttons 33a to 33c are operated, the reel control means 120 configures the winning combination 02 on the effective line. It is possible to stop any one of a plurality of combinations of symbols on the effective line. In the middle reel 21b, one of the symbols of "red 7", "blue 7", "bar", and "character" is disposed within 5 symbols. That is, even if the middle stop button 33b is operated at any timing, any one of the symbols of "red 7", "blue 7", "bar" and "character" can be drawn on the effective line and stopped. . The relationship between the symbols of "bar", "watermelon" and "Replay B" on the right reel 21c and the operation timing of the right stop button 33c is the same as the middle reel 21b and the middle stop button 33b. Therefore, even if each of these reels 21a to 21c is at any rotational position, when the stop buttons 33a to 33c are operated, the reel control means 120 configures the winning combination 24 on the effective line. It is possible to stop any one of a plurality of combinations of symbols on the effective line. At this time, even if any combination of symbols of the winning combination 24 stops in the middle, as is apparent from FIG. 4, the symbols of "bell"-"bell"-"bell" are always aligned in the lower part.

  Hereinafter, as an example of the stop control by the reel control means 120 when the pushing order bell is won, the case where the winning combination-A1 is a winning combination will be described for each pressing order of the stop buttons 33a to 33c. In addition, as shown in FIG. 8, for the winning combination-A1, the winning combination 01, the winning combination 07, the winning combination 13 and the winning combination 19 are dually won, and the correct pressing order (the seven winning combinations being the winning combination 01 The order in which the symbol combinations are aligned on the effective line) is "left middle right".

-When the stop buttons 33a to 33c are operated in the order of left, middle and right-
When the winning combination-A1 is determined as the winning combination, the stop buttons 33a to 33c are operated in the left middle right order, that is, the left stop button 33a is operated as the first stop, and the middle stop as the second stop When the button 33b is operated and the third stop is performed and the right stop button 33c is operated, the reel control unit 120 operates the stop buttons 33a to 33c according to the "number priority stop control", and the winning combination is made on the activated line. The combination of the symbols of 01 is stopped and 7 game medals are paid out ("o" in FIG. 9A). Specifically, when the left stop button 33a which is the first stop is operated, the symbol of "bell" is stopped and displayed in the middle of the left reel 21a, and when the middle stop button 33b which is the second stop is operated, the middle reel 21b The symbol of "bell" is stopped and displayed in the middle of the, and the symbol of "bell" is stopped and displayed in the middle of the right reel 21c when the right stop button 33c which is the third stop is operated. Here, the “number priority stop control” refers to the reels 21 a ̃ so that the combination of symbols corresponding to the combination with the highest payout number among the plurality of winning combinations winning in duplicate is displayed on the activated line. 21c refers to stop control. In the present embodiment, among the winning combinations winning in the winning combination-A1, the number of game medals to be paid out is the highest, as shown in FIG. 5, is the winning combination 01 in which seven gaming medals are paid out.

-When the stop buttons 33a to 33c are operated in the order of left and right-
Even when the stop buttons 33a to 33c are operated in the order of left and right, the reel control means 120 stops the combination of the symbols of the winning combination 01 on the activated line according to the "number priority stop control" Pay out ("o" in FIG. 9A). That is, when the left stop button 33a which is the first stop is operated, the symbol "BELL" is stopped and displayed in the middle of the left reel 21a. When the right stop button 33c which is the second stop is operated, it is displayed in the middle of the right reel 21c. The symbol "BELL" is stopped and displayed, and the symbol "BELL" is stopped and displayed on the middle step of the middle reel 21b when the middle stop button 33b which is the third stop is operated.

-When the stop buttons 33a to 33c are operated in the middle and left order-
When the middle stop button 33b which is the first stop is operated, the reel control means 120 determines a symbol to be stopped at the middle stage (on the effective line) of the middle reel 21b according to the "number priority stop control". Here, "number priority stop control" is a role having a winning possibility when the symbol is stopped on the effective line within the stoppable range when stoppage of one reel (each of 21a to 21c) is accepted. Indicates stop control of the reels 21a to 21c so that the number of symbols is the largest (when a combination of a plurality of symbols is assigned to one role, it is considered as one role for each combination of symbols) . In the case of the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, among the combinations of symbols constituting the winning combination-A1, those including the symbols of "bell", "character", "watermelon" and "bar" in the middle reel 21b are each Although there is one, there are two that include the "blank" symbol. Further, in the middle reel 21b, the symbol "blank" can be always drawn on the effective line and displayed in a stopped state regardless of the operation timing of the middle stop button 33b. Therefore, the reel control means 120 stops the "blank" symbol (the symbol forming the winning combination 07) in the middle (on the effective line) of the middle reel 21b in response to the operation of the middle stop button 33b which is the first stop. Display.

  Next, since the symbol of "blank" is stopped at the middle of the middle reel 21b at the time of operation of the left stop button 33a which is the second stop, the symbol of "Replay A" is stopped and displayed at the middle of the left reel 21a. By doing this, the combination of symbols of the winning combination 07 can be aligned on the effective line. Therefore, when the left stop button 33a is operated, the reel control means 120 can draw a symbol of "Replay A" into the middle row of the left reel 21a and can display the symbol when the symbol can be stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when it is not possible to pull in, for example, the symbol of "Replay B" is stopped and displayed in the middle of the left reel 21a.

  Then, when the right stop button 33c which is the third stop is operated, the symbol of "Replay A" is stopped and displayed in the middle of the left reel 21a, and the symbol of "blank" is stopped and displayed in the middle of the middle reel 21b. When the reel control means 120 can stop and display the "watermelon" symbol in the middle of the right reel 21c, the reel control means 120 pulls this symbol into the middle of the right reel 21c and displays the symbol. On the other hand, when the symbol of "Replay B" is stopped and displayed in the middle of the left reel 21a when it is not possible to draw in, the symbol of "Replay A" is stopped and displayed in the middle of the right reel 21c. The symbol combination of the specific symbol 03 is stopped and displayed on the effective line (“Δor ×” in FIG. 9A).

  Here, as shown in FIG. 4, the symbols of "Replay A" on the left reel 21a are arranged at No. 1 and No. 16. Therefore, as described later, when the left stop button 33a is operated when the 11th to 15th symbols are in the middle of the left reel 21a, the 16th "Replay A" symbol is set to the middle of the left reel 21a. It can be stopped. In addition, when the left stop button 33a is operated when the 16th to 0th symbols are in the middle of the left reel 21a, the 1st symbol "Replay A" can be stopped at the middle of the left reel 21a. . That is, when the left stop button 33a is operated when the ten symbols of No. 11 to No. 10 are at the middle of the left reel 21a, the symbol of "Replay A" can be stopped at the middle of the left reel 21a. The probability that the symbol of "Replay A" can be stopped and displayed in the middle on the left reel 21a is 1/2 (= 10/20). Similarly, in the right reel 21c, since the symbols of "watermelon" are arranged at No. 7 and No. 2, the right stop button 33c is operated when the No. 17 to No. 6 symbols are in the middle of the right reel 21c. Then, since the symbol of "watermelon" can be stopped and displayed in the middle of the right reel 21c, the probability is 1/2. Therefore, the probability that the combination of symbols of the winning combination 07 is stopped and displayed on the effective line is 1⁄4 (= 1⁄2 × 1⁄2).

  From the above, when the stop buttons 33a to 33c are operated in the middle left or right order, the symbol combination of the winning combination 07 is stopped and displayed on the effective line with a probability of 1⁄4, 3/4 (= 1-1 The combination of the symbols of the specific symbol 03 (hereinafter also referred to as "bell spilled eyes") is stopped and displayed on the effective line with the probability of / 4).

-When the stop buttons 33a to 33c are operated in the order of middle right and left-
As described in the stop control when the middle left and right are operated, when the middle stop button 33b which is the first stop is operated, the reel control means 120 controls the middle step of the middle reel 21b according to the "number priority stop control". Top) "Stop""blank", which is a symbol of the winning combination 07, is displayed.

  Next, since the symbol of "blank" is stopped and displayed in the middle of the middle reel 21b when the right stop button 33c which is the second stop is operated, the symbol of "watermelon" is stopped and displayed in the middle of the right reel 21c. Then, the combination of symbols of the winning combination 07 can be aligned on the effective line. Therefore, when the right stop button 33c is operated, the reel control means 120 can draw a symbol of "watermelon" into the middle row of the right reel 21c and can display the symbol when it can be stopped. On the other hand, when it is not possible to pull in, for example, the symbol of "Replay A" is stopped and displayed in the middle of the right reel 21c.

  Then, when the left stop button 33a which is the third stop is operated, the symbol of "blank" is stopped and displayed in the middle of the middle reel 21b and the symbol of "watermelon" is stopped and displayed in the middle of the right reel 21c. When the reel control means 120 can stop and display the symbol "Replay A" in the middle of the left reel 21a, the reel control means 120 pulls this symbol and displays the symbol. On the other hand, when it is not possible to pull in, the symbol of "bell" is stopped and displayed in the middle of the left reel 21a, and the combination of the symbols of the specific symbol 02 is stopped and displayed. When the symbol of "blank" is stopped and displayed in the middle of the middle reel 21b and the symbol of "Replay A" is stopped and displayed in the middle of the right reel 21c, "Replay A" or in the middle of the left reel 21a By stopping and displaying one of the symbols of “Replay B”, the combination of symbols of the specific symbol 03 is stopped and displayed on the effective line (“Δor ×” in FIG. 9A).

  From the above, when the stop buttons 33a to 33c are operated in the middle left or right order, the combination of the symbols of the winning combination 07 is stopped and displayed on the effective line with a probability of 1⁄4, similarly to the middle right left. The symbol combination of the specific symbol 02 or the specific symbol 03 is stopped and displayed on the effective line with a probability of 3/4.

-When the stop buttons 33a to 33c are operated in the right middle left order-
At the time of operation of the right stop button 33c which is the first stop, the reel control means 120 determines a symbol to be stopped and displayed on the middle stage (on the effective line) of the right reel 21c according to the "number priority stop control". In the case of the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, among the combinations of symbols constituting the winning combination-A1, those including the symbols of "bell", "character", "watermelon" and "blank" on the right reel 21c are each Although there is only one, two including the symbol of "Replay A" are two. Also, in the right reel 21c, the symbol of "Replay A" can always be drawn on the effective line and stopped, regardless of the operation timing of the right stop button 33c. Therefore, the reel control means 120, in response to the operation of the right stop button 33c which is the first stop, the symbol (the symbol constituting the winning combination 13) of "Replay A" in the middle stage (on the effective line) Stop display.

  Next, since the symbol of "Replay A" is stopped at the middle of the right reel 21c when the left stop button 33a is operated at the second stop, the symbol of "Replay A" is stopped at the middle of the left reel 21a. By displaying, the combination of the symbols of the winning combination 13 can be aligned on the effective line. Therefore, when the left stop button 33a is operated, the reel control means 120 can draw a symbol of "Replay A" into the middle row of the left reel 21a and can display the symbol when the symbol can be stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when it is not possible to pull in, for example, the symbol of "Replay B" is stopped and displayed in the middle of the left reel 21a.

  Then, when the middle stop button 33b which is the third stop is operated, the symbol of "Replay A" is stopped and displayed in the middle of the left reel 21a, and the symbol of "Replay A" is stopped and displayed in the middle of the right reel 21c. When it is determined that the symbol of "watermelon" can be stopped and displayed on the middle step of the middle reel 21b, the reel control means 120 pulls this symbol and displays the stop. On the other hand, when the symbol of "Replay B" is stopped and displayed in the middle of the left reel 21a when it can not be pulled in, the symbol of "blank" is specified by stopping and displayed in the middle of the middle reel 21b. The symbol combination of the symbol 03 is stopped and displayed on the effective line (“Δor ×” in FIG. 9A).

  As described above, the probability that the symbol of “Replay A” can be stopped and displayed in the middle on the left reel 21 a is 1⁄2. In the middle reel 21b, since the symbols of "watermelon" are arranged at No. 9 and No. 4, the middle stop button 33b is operated when the No. 19 to No. 8 symbols are in the middle of the middle reel 21b. Then, since the symbol of "watermelon" can be stopped and displayed on the middle stage of the middle reel 21b, the probability is 1/2. Therefore, the probability that the symbol combination of the winning combination 13 is stopped and displayed on the effective line is 1⁄4 (= 1⁄2 × 1⁄2).

  From the above, when the stop buttons 33a to 33c are operated in the right middle left order, the symbol combination of the winning combination 13 is stopped and displayed on the effective line with a probability of 1⁄4, 3/4 (= 1-1 The combination of symbols of the specific symbol 03 is stopped and displayed on the effective line with the probability of / 4).

-When the stop buttons 33a to 33c are operated in the order of right middle left-
As described in the stop control when operated in the right and left, when the right stop button 33c which is the first stop is operated, the reel control means 120 controls the middle step of the right reel 21c according to the "number priority stop control". Top) "Replay A", which is a symbol of the winning combination 13, is stopped and displayed.

  Next, since the symbol of "Replay A" is stopped and displayed in the middle of the right reel 21c when the middle stop button 33b which is the second stop is operated, the symbol of "watermelon" is stopped in the middle of the middle reel 21b. By displaying the symbols that make up the winning combination 13, the combination of the symbols of the winning combination 13 can be aligned on the effective line. Therefore, when the middle stop button 33b is operated, the reel control means 120 can draw a symbol of "watermelon" into the middle row of the middle reel 21b and can make a stop display when the symbol of "watermelon" can be stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when it is not possible to pull in, for example, the symbol of "blank" is stopped and displayed in the middle of the left reel 21a.

  Then, when the left stop button 33a which is the third stop is operated, the symbol of "watermelon" is stopped and displayed in the middle of the middle reel 21b, and the symbol of "Replay A" is stopped and displayed in the middle of the right reel 21c. When the symbol of "Replay A" can be stopped and displayed, the reel control means 120 pulls this symbol into the middle of the left reel 21a and displays the symbol. On the other hand, when it is not possible to pull in, the symbol of "bell" is stopped and displayed in the middle of the left reel 21a, and the symbol combination of the specific symbol 05 is stopped and displayed on the effective line. When the symbol of "blank" is stopped and displayed in the middle of the middle reel 21b and the symbol of "Replay A" is stopped and displayed in the middle of the right reel 21c, "Replay A" or in the middle of the left reel 21a By stopping and displaying one of the symbols of “Replay B”, the combination of symbols of the specific symbol 03 is stopped and displayed on the effective line (“Δor ×” in FIG. 9A).

  From the above, when the stop buttons 33a to 33c are operated in the right middle left order, the symbol combination of the winning combination 13 is stopped and displayed on the effective line with a probability of 1/4 as in the right middle left The symbol combination of the specific symbol 03 or the specific symbol 05 is stopped and displayed on the effective line with a probability of 3/4.

  Here, the case of winning the winning combination-A1 has been described as an example of the pushing order bell, but also for the winning combination-A2 to A6, in the correct pushing order shown in FIG. When the operation is performed in order), the combination of symbols of 7-piece combination (prize combination 01 or combination combination 02) is stopped and displayed on the effective line, and 7 game medals are paid out, and other push order ( When the operation is performed in the order of pressing shown by “Δor ×”, the combination of the symbols of one winning combination is stopped and displayed with a probability of 1⁄4, 1 gaming medal is paid out, 3⁄4 The combination of symbols of the specific symbol (one of the specific symbols 01 to 05) is stopped and displayed on the effective line with the probability of. In the above description, the bell spilled symbol for the winning combination-A1 is described as the specific symbol 02, 03, 05, but the winning combinations-A2 to A6 are also determined according to the winning combinations constituting them. , The specific symbols 01 to 05 become a bell spilled eye.

  Also, for the winning combinations-B1 to B6, when the stop buttons 33a to 33c are operated in the correct order of pressing shown in FIG. 9A, the symbol of the seven-piece combination (winning combination 01 or winning combination 02) When the combination is stopped and displayed on the effective line, seven game medals are paid out, and the operation is performed in the other pushing order (the pushing order indicated by “Δor ×”), the probability of 1⁄4 The combination of the symbol of one piece is stopped and displayed, and one game medal is paid out, and the combination of the symbols of the specific symbol (one of the specific symbols 01 to 05) is on the effective line with a probability of 3/4. Stop display. However, in the internal middle game state (RT4 game state) described later, the combination of the symbols of the winning combination 01 or the winning combination 02 is stopped on the effective line regardless of the operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 33a to 33c. , And seven game medals are paid out.

  Note that the specific symbols 01 to 05 which are displayed in a stopped state when the winning combinations -A1 to A6 and the winning combinations -B1 to B6 are won may be a trigger for transition of the gaming state described later.

-About other winning combinations-
Further, among the symbols constituting the winning combination 21, on the left reel 21a of the winning combination -C, regardless of the operation timing of the left stop button 33a, either the symbol of "Replay A" or "Replay B" It can be stopped in the middle, but the probability that the "watermelon" symbol in the middle reel 21b stops in the middle is 1/2, and either the "red 7" or "character" symbol in the right reel 21c is the middle Since the probability of stopping is 1/2, the symbol combination of the winning combination 21 is stopped and displayed on the effective line with a probability of 1/4, and with the probability of 3/4, the symbol combination shown in FIG. 5 A combination of symbols (hereinafter referred to as "missing eyes") which does not correspond to any of them is stopped and displayed on the effective line. As apparent from FIG. 4, when the combination of symbols of the winning combination 21 is stopped and displayed on the effective line, the symbol of "watermelon" will be aligned on the downward sloping line in the reel display window 11. Can be used as so-called "watermelon".

  Also, among the symbols constituting the winning combination 20, the winning combination-D may be any symbol on the middle reel 21b, and on the right reel 21c, regardless of the operation timing of the right stop button 33c, "watermelon "," Cherry "," Bell "," Replay A "can be displayed in the middle of the stop, but the" bar "in the left reel 21a, the symbols of No. 9 to No. 13 are in the middle When the left stop button 33a is operated, it can be stopped and displayed in the middle, so the probability that the combination of symbols of the winning combination 20 can be stopped and displayed on the effective line is 1/4 (= 5/20 ). Therefore, when the winning combination-D is won, the combination of symbols of the winning combination 20 is stopped and displayed on the effective line with a probability of 1/4, and the lost eye is stopped and displayed on the effective line with a probability of 3/4. Ru. As apparent from FIG. 4, when the combination of symbols of the winning combination 20 is stopped and displayed on the effective line, the symbol of "cherry" is displayed at the lower left corner (lower part of the left reel 21a) in 11 until the reel display. It will be stopped and can be used as a so-called "cherry".

  In addition, when the winning combination-E is won, any combination of the symbols of the winning combination 23 is stopped and displayed on the effective line regardless of the operation order and the operation timing of the stop buttons 33a to 33c. When the combination of the symbols of the winning combination 23 stops on the effective line, as is clear from FIG. The symbol stops (for example, when the stop operation is performed in the left middle right order, in the first stop and the second stop, "bell"-"bell" is stopped and displayed at the bottom, and then the third stop causes the missing eye ). Therefore, it can be used as a so-called "slip chance eye".

  Further, as described above, any combination of symbols that can be stopped and displayed on the activated line regardless of the operation order and timing of the stop buttons 33a to 33c, as described above It is. Therefore, the reel control means 120 may be configured to always stop and display the combination of the symbols of the winning combination 01 on the effective line when the winning combination-F is won, or the combination of the symbols of the winning combination 02 The stop combination may be displayed on the pay line, or either the winning combination 01 or the win combination 02 may be displayed on the pay line depending on the operation timing or the like. This winning combination-F can be used as a so-called "common bell".

  The winning combination-G is a combination to be won when the BB game is executed as described above, and when the winning combination-G is elected, the reel control means 120 selects the combination of the symbols of the winning combination 24. The stop display is made on the effective line, and as a result, 12 game medals are paid out. In addition, when the combination of the symbols of the winning combination 24 is stopped and displayed on the effective line, the symbol "BELL"-"BELL"-"BELL" is displayed in the lower part of the reel display window 11 so that it is not clear from FIG. Will be aligned.

-About Replay Role-
In addition, as shown in FIG. 8, the re-playing role (Replay) which is the winning combination is Re-playing role-A, Re-playing role-B, Re-playing role-C1 to C6, Re-playing role-D1 to D3, Re-playing role- It consists of a game combination-E and a re-play combination-F1 to F5, and these re-play combination is configured by combining the re-play combination 01 to 08 shown in Fig. 5 (the parenthesis in Fig. 8). The meaning of the numbers shown in is the same as in the winning combination). Note that these replay players have a stop button 33a, as is apparent from the arrangement of the symbols of the reels 21a to 21c shown in FIG. 4 and the combination of the symbols assigned to replay players 01 to 08 shown in FIG. A combination of symbols of any one of these replay roles 01 to 08 is configured to stop on the effective line, regardless of the timing at which ~ 33c is operated.

  Here, Replay role-A is a role in which a combination of symbols of Replay role 01 is stopped and displayed on the effective line regardless of the operation order and timing of the stop buttons 33a to 33c. That is, the symbols "Replay A / Replay B"-"Replay A"-"Replay A / Replay B" are aligned in the middle of the reel display window 11, and can be used as so-called "normal replay".

  In addition, Replay role-B is a role in which the combination of symbols of the replay role 02 is stopped and displayed on the effective line regardless of the operation order and timing of the stop buttons 33a to 33c. As apparent from FIG. 4, when the symbol combination of the replay player combination 02 is stopped and displayed on the effective line, “Replay A / Replay B”-“Replay A”-“ The symbols of Replay A are aligned, and can be used as so-called "parallel replay".

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9B, the pressing order of the stop buttons 33a to 33c is assigned to the replaying role-C1 to C6 and the replaying role-F1 to F5 (hereinafter, these replaying functions The role is called "push order replay"). Specifically, in each of the re-playing roles-C1 to C6, a combination of symbols of the re-playing roles 02 is stopped and displayed on the activated line, and the re-playing roles 03 or the re-playing roles 04 symbol A push order in which the combination is stopped and displayed on the effective line is assigned. As apparent from FIG. 4, when the symbol combination of the replay player combination 03 is stopped and displayed on the effective line, “Replay A / Replay B”-“Replay A” on the downward sloping line in the reel display window 11. "A"-"Replay A" symbols are aligned, and when the combination of symbols of Replay role 04 is stopped and displayed on the effective line, "Replay A / Replay" is displayed on the upper right line in the reel display window 11. The symbols of B "-" Replay A "-" Replay A "are aligned and can be used as a so-called" diagonal replay ". "

  In addition, in each of the re-playing role-F1 to F5, the combination of symbols of the re-playing role 08 is stopped and displayed on the activated line, and the combination of the re-playing role 02 is displayed on the activated line. The order of push is assigned. Here, in Replay role-F5, even if the stop buttons 33a to 33c are operated in the middle left or right order, the symbol of the Replay role 08 is stopped and displayed on the effective line even if it is operated in the right middle left order It is configured to be. As apparent from FIG. 4, when the symbol combination of the replay player combination 08 is stopped and displayed on the effective line, “Replay A / Replay B”-“Replay A”-“Bell” is displayed in the upper row in the reel display window 11. When the symbol of "" is stopped and displayed and the symbol combination of replay player combination 02 is stopped and displayed on the effective line, "Replay A / Replay B"-on the upper stage in the reel display window 11 as described above "Replay A"-The symbol of "Replay A" is stopped and displayed.

  It should be noted that the symbols of Replays 02, Replays 03, Replays 04 and Replays 08 are displayed stopped when winning the Replays-C1 to C6 and Replays-F1 to F5. The combination relates to the transition of the gaming state described later.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9B, the pressing order of the stop buttons 33a to 33c is also assigned to the replaying roles-D1 to D3, and depending on the pressing order, the replaying role 05 or the replaying role is performed. The combination of the symbols of 01 is stopped and displayed on the activated line, but it is not related to the transition of the gaming state. Here, as described above, the symbol combinations “Replay A / Replay B”-“Replay A”-“Replay A / Replay B” are aligned in the middle of the reel display window 11 as described above. As shown in FIG. 4, when the combination of the symbols of the replay player combination 05 is stopped and displayed on the effective line, the upper left (upper stage of the left reel 21a) and the middle (middle reel 21b middle) in the reel display window 11 are clear. The symbols of "Replay A / Replay B"-"Replay A"-"Replay A" are arranged in a V shape in the order of upper right (upper row of right reel 21c)) By doing this, it is possible to give the player an indication of the gaming state or the rendering state.

  Further, as described above, both of the re-play role 03 and the re-play role 04 constituting the re-play role-E can be stopped and displayed on the effective line regardless of the operation order and timing of the stop buttons 33a to 33 c. It is a combination of symbols. Therefore, the reel control means 120 may be configured to always stop and display the combination of symbols of replay player combination 03 on the activated line when the player wins replay player combination E, The combination of symbols may be configured to be stopped on the activated line, or it may be configured to be stopped and displayed on the activated line depending on the operation timing etc. May be

  In such a slot machine 1, when a special combination is won, the re-play combination 01 and the winning combination 01 may be configured to be overlapped and be won. For example, in the case of a configuration in which the special combination and the winning combination 01 or the replay combination 01 are dually won, in the game in which the special combination is won, the combination of the symbols of the combination combination 01 or the replay combination 01 takes precedence over the effective line. In order to align, the combination of the special part symbols in the game is never aligned. Not limited to this, the special part may be elected independently, and when the transition from the non-internal internal game state to the internal internal game state is made, the special part is won (the combination of the special part symbols is stopped on the effective line) In order to make it difficult, it is possible to increase the number of winning areas of the replay player (for example, increase the frequency of losing in the non-internal play state, and lose in the internal play state) By making the area into the area of the replay role, it is possible to make it difficult to win the special role). In addition, a special part (this is called "special part 1") which can be won in a game betted with two game medals (two bet game) is provided, and this special part 1 has three games. By making it impossible to stop the combination of the symbols on the activated line in the game in which the bet is placed on the medal (three bet game), the special role 1 is not won in the three bet game (special It can also be configured to continue the internal middle game state in which the combination 1 is won. In this case, a special part (which is called “special part 2”) may be provided which can be won by a game of three bets. In this case, the special part 2 may stop the combination of the symbols on the activated line in the 3-bet game, but may not stop it in the 2-bet game. In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8, the special role (BB1 to B) is a replay player combination -A, a winning combination -C, a winning combination -D, a winning combination -E and a winning combination -F. It is configured to win at the same time as BB3). In a winning combination in which the player combination or the winning combination and the special combination have a double winning combination, the condition device number (winning number) to be described later is assigned the same number as that of the special combination or the winning combination ing.

  Here, a method of stop control of the reels 21 a to 21 c by the reel control unit 120 will be described. In order to control the above-mentioned reels 21a to 21c, the reel control means 120 is, as shown in FIG. And a rotation stop control means 125.

(Rotation start control means 121)
The rotation start control means 121 is for performing control regarding the start of rotation of the reels 21a to 21c, and more specifically, the start signal output based on the operation of the start lever 32 is input, A rotation start signal is output to stepping motors (reel drive means 22a to 22c) provided on each of the reels 21a to 21c, and the rotation of all the reels 21a to 21c is started by activating these stepping motors. Is configured as. In addition, when the start lever 32 is operated, the rotation start control means 121 rotates all the reels 21a to 21c at a predetermined acceleration, and the rotational speeds of all the reels 21a to 21c become a predetermined speed. When reached, constant speed rotation is performed at this predetermined speed.

(Stop table storage means 122)
The stop table storage unit 122 stores a stop order selection table and a stop table which are information for stopping the reels 21a to 21c. The stop table is, as shown in FIG. 10B, in each of the reels 21a to 21c, when the stop button 33a to 33c is operated, the symbol number at the position corresponding to the middle row of the reel display window 11 (0 No. 19) is a table which defines which symbol is to be stopped at the position corresponding to the lower part, and a table number is assigned to each. For example, the stop table shown in FIG. 10B shows a table used to stop the winning combination -A1, which is one of the push order bells.

  Specifically, in FIG. 10 (b), the first table is used to stop the "bell" symbol in the middle of the left reel 21a. In addition, since the arrangement of the symbols of "bell" in the left reel 21a and the arrangement of the symbols of "blank" in the middle reel 21b are the same, the first table has a symbol of "blank" in the middle of the middle reel 21b. It is also used to stop the The second table is used to stop the "bell" symbol in the middle of the middle reel 21b. The third table is used to stop the "bell" symbol in the middle of the right reel 21c. Further, since the arrangement of the symbols of "bell" on the right reel 21c and the arrangement of the symbols of "Replay A" and "Replay B" on the left reel 21a are the same, the third table is the middle row of the left reel 21a. It is also used to stop the "Replay A" and "Replay B" symbols. In addition, the No. 4 table draws the symbol of "watermelon" on the middle line of the right reel 21c when it is stopped and displays the symbol of "Replay A" when it can not be drawn. Used for In addition, the fifth table draws the symbol of "Replay A" in the middle of the left reel 21a when it is stopped and displays the symbol on the effective line, and when it can not pull it in, the symbol of "bell" is stopped and displayed. Used for In addition, the No. 6 table draws the symbol of "watermelon" on the middle line of the middle reel 21b to stop the symbol on the effective line, and can not display the symbol of "blank" if it can not be pulled in. Used for

  In addition, in the stop table, when it is possible to select two symbol numbers (for example, for the winning combination 7, the symbol of "watermelon" is not the second or seventh symbol in the middle of the right reel 21c, but is the third It is also possible to stop the symbol of "Chara", and in this case, if the stop operation is accepted with the symbol of "0" of "Cherry", the symbol of "1" of "Bell" should be stopped at the bottom. If the second "watermelon" symbol stops in the middle, and the second "watermelon" symbol stops in the bottom, then the third "chara" symbol stops in the middle) The symbol numbers may be set in advance, or both may be set to select symbol numbers to be stopped according to a predetermined algorithm according to the operation timing of the stop buttons 33a to 33c.

  Here, FIG. 10 (b) only exemplifies the case of the winning combination-A1, which is also defined for other winning combinations. Then, as shown in the specific stop control of the reel control means 120 described by taking the above-mentioned winning combination-A1 as an example, which stop table is used according to the winning combination and the pressing order (strike order) of the stop buttons 33a to 33c. You can decide what to do. The slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment stores the relationship between the winning combination and the batting order in the stop order selection table shown in FIG. 10 (a). Here, a symbol control number is assigned to the winning combination (conditional device number) in the winning combination determination means 110, and the stop order selection table defines the relationship between the batting order and the table using the symbol control number as a key. There is. Note that FIG. 10A only exemplifies the case of the winning combination-A1, and is also defined for other winning combinations. In addition, portions separated by slashes indicate cases where the table to be selected is different depending on the symbols already stopped.

  Further, in the stop order selection table and the stop table shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B, a part of the tables may be shared by two or more reels. For example, as described above, when stopping the symbol of "bell" in the middle of the left reel 21a and when stopping the symbol of "blank" in the upper row of the middle reel 21b, the symbol of the middle which received the stop button Since the numbers of symbols to be stopped at the lower side are the same, a common stop table (for example, the first table) can be shared by the left reel 21a and the middle reel 21b. By configuring in this manner, the storage capacity for the stop table can be reduced, and the ROM 105 and the like can be used effectively. Of course, each may be defined in another table.

  In the stop table shown in FIG. 10 (b), there is a correspondence between the symbol number located at the middle stage when the reception operation is performed and the symbol number of the symbol number for the symbol number to be stopped at the lower stage. Although defined, the present invention is not limited to this configuration. For example, it is also possible to have a table configuration that defines how many frames are slipped and stopped for the symbol number for which the reception operation has been performed. For example, the stop table with the table number 1 shown in FIG. 10B is for stopping the symbol of "bell" in the middle of the left reel 21a. Here, when the left stop button 33a is operated when the symbol of "replay B" of No. 6 is in the middle of the left reel 21a, the symbol of "blank" of No. 9 is stopped at the lower part. Therefore, when defining the stop table by the number of sliding frames (number of sliding frames), "4" is set for the symbol number of No. 6 (the symbol of No. 9 when sliding from No. 6 to No. 4 in the middle) Stop in the middle). Such a stop table based on the number of slips can be used for any of the reels 21a to 21b of the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, and among the reels 21a to 21b, for some rules, The stop table shown in FIG. 10 (b) may be used, and the stop table defined by the number of sliding frames may be used for the remaining reels.

(Stop position data creation means 123)
The stop position data creation unit 123 determines the stop position to stop the reels 21a to 21c when the stop buttons 33a to 33c are operated based on the result of the lottery by the winning combination determination unit 110, the above-described stop order Based on the selection table, one of the tables is selected from the stop table to generate stop position data. When the start lever 32 is operated and all the three reels 21a to 21c are rotated at a constant speed, three stop position data creating means 123 are required until the stop button of the first stop is operated. For each of the reels 21a to 21c, the stop table is selected based on the stop order selection table to generate stop position data. Also, after the stop button for the first stop (any of the stop buttons 33a to 33c) is operated, the stop button for the second stop is operated at the latest from this first stop (that is, the stop for the second stop) During the time when the operation of the butane is received), the remaining two reels for which the operation of the stop button has not been performed when the stop button of the first stop is operated (ie, the stop button of the first stop) The stop table is selected based on the stop order selection table and stop position data is created for each of the two reels rotating at the time of operation of. Similarly, after the second stop button is operated, the third stop button is operated at the latest after the second stop button is operated (ie, the third stop button is operated). 1) until the time when the operation is accepted, the remaining one reel for which the operation of the stop button has not been performed at the time the stop button of the second stop is operated (ie, the operation of the stop button of the second stop) The stop table is selected based on the stop order selection table and the stop position data is created for one reel which is rotating at the point in time.

  For example, after the start lever 32 is operated, the left stop button 33a corresponding to the left reel 21a, the middle stop button 33b corresponding to the middle reel 21b, and the right stop button 33c corresponding to the right reel 21c (ie, winning) It is assumed that the operation of the stop buttons 33a to 33c is performed in the order of pressing the correct answer to the combination-A1). In this case, when the start lever 32 is operated and the rotational speeds of all the three reels 21a to 21c become constant, the stop position data creation unit 123 selects the stop table for all the reels 21a to 21c. Create stop position data. In the example shown in FIG. 10A, the first table is selected for the left reel 21a and the fourth table for the middle reel 21b before the first stop, and the right reel 21c is selected. The third table is selected to create stop position data. When the left stop button 33a is operated as the first stop, stop position data is selected for the rotating left reel 21a and the right reel 21c until the second stop middle stop button 33b is operated. And create stop position data again. That is, the second table is selected for the middle reel 21b, and the third table is selected for the right reel 21c. Furthermore, when the middle stop button 33b is operated as the second stop, the stop position data is selected for the rotating right reel 21c and the stop position is performed until the third stop, the right stop button 33c, is operated. Create the data again. Here, the second table is selected for the right reel 21c. In the creation of the stop position data for the third stop, although the second stop table is selected for the right reel 21c, the second stop table for the second stop is already selected and the stop position data is Since it is created, there is no need to create again, and the stop position data for the second stop can be used as it is at the third stop (of course, it may be recreated again).

  In addition, when the start lever 32 is operated, the stop position data creation means 123 is not when the rotational speeds of all the three reels 21a to 21 become constant, but for all the three reels 21a to 21c. The stop table is selected and stop position data is created for all the reels 21a to 21c until the rotation speed reaches a constant speed or until the reels 21a to 21c start to rotate. May be In addition, the stop position data creation unit 123 does not select the stop table again after the last stop button is operated among the stop buttons 33a to 33c until the next stop button is operated. The stop position is selected and the stop position is selected until the time when the next stop button can be operated (that is, the time when the next stop button can be received) after the previous stop button operation. It may be configured to recreate the data.

  Here, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, any one of the stop buttons 33a to 33c is operated from when the start lever 32 is operated to when the first stop button is operated. In order to be able to select stop tables for all reels in rotation among the reels 21a to 21c and to generate stop position data by the time the operation is performed until the next stop button is operated, the start lever 32 And after stop button 33a-33c is operated, the reception impossible period which makes the operation of the next stop button impossible is provided for a predetermined time. Further, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the time for the rotational speed of all the three reels 21a to 21c to become constant after the start lever 32 is operated is a stop for the reels 21a to 21c. It is sufficient to select data and create stop position data.

(Rotational position detection means 124)
The rotational position detection means 124 is for detecting the positions of the reels 21a to 21c when the stop buttons 33a to 33c are operated. Specifically, although not particularly shown, the rotational position detecting means 124 is a counting means for counting pulse signals outputted from the stepping motor (reel driving means 22a to 22c), and a pulse by the counting means. A reset means for resetting the count value of the signal is provided. More specifically, after each of the reels 21a to 21c starts to rotate and all the reels 21a to 21c rotate at a constant speed, a detected object is detected by a reel sensor (not shown). In response to the detection of the passage of the member (index), the counting means starts counting the pulse signal output from the stepping motor. Then, based on the count value at the time when the stop buttons 33a to 33c are operated, the rotation angle of the detected member (index) is calculated, whereby the reels 21a to 21c at the time when the stop buttons 33a to 33c are operated. The position will be detected. Further, the count value of the pulse signal by the counting means is reset by the resetting means every time the passage of the detected member (index) is detected by the reel sensor, and the pulse signal is newly counted from this time point. ing.

(Rotation stop control means 125)
The rotation stop control means 125 sets the positions of the reels 21a to 21c when the stop buttons 33a to 33c are operated in the stop position data created by the stop position data creating means 123a based on the operation of the stop buttons 33a to 33c These reels 21a to 21c are to be stopped at the correspondingly determined stop positions. That is, when the stop buttons 33a to 33c are operated, the reels 21a at the stop positions determined in the stop position data, corresponding to the positions of the reels 21a to 21c when the stop buttons 33a to 33c are operated. 21c will stop.

  Note that FIG. 8 also shows the winning probability of the winning combination (the configuration of the winning combination drawing table) in each gaming state described later. Here, the numerical values shown in FIG. 8 indicate the numerical value (the value of the numerator when the denominator is 65,536), and the symbol "-" shown for each role indicates that the lottery for that role is a line in the game state. It shows that you can not do it. In addition, the probability that none of the winning combinations will be won (the probability in the case of so-called “loss”) is a value obtained by subtracting the sum of the winning probabilities of the special winning combination, the winning combination and the re-playing combination from 1 (in the case of multiples, A value obtained by subtracting the total value of the special part, the winning combination and the re-playing combination from 65536). In addition, it is not necessary to provide a "loss" (it may be comprised so that it may be elected by any means by lottery). Further, when the result of the part drawing is a loss, the reel control means 120 is configured to stop on the effective line the symbol combination (missing eyes) that does not correspond to any of the symbol combinations shown in FIG. 5 There is.

(Prize judging means 130)
When all the reels 21a to 21c are stopped, the prize determination means 130 determines whether or not the combination of the symbols of the winning combination is lined up on the above-mentioned effective line, and if there is anything in line, the game is It is determined that the winning combination is achieved (winning), or the specific symbol to which the gaming state shifts has stopped. At this time, the prize determination means 130 determines the symbols located on the effective line by detecting, for example, the angle at the time of stopping the stepping motor, the number of steps, etc., using the reel position detection means 23a to 23c. It is determined on the basis of the presence or absence of winning (winning) of the winning combination. In the case where a table is used for control when stopping the reels 21a to 21c, the reels 21a to 21c do not actually determine the combination of symbols after the reels 21a to 21c are actually stopped, but the reel control When the stop positions of the reels 21a to 21c are determined by the means 120 using the table as described above, the combination of symbols to be stopped on the effective line may be determined.

(Discharge control means 140)
The payout control means 140 pays out the game medals according to the winning combination (the winning combination in the slot machine according to the present embodiment) as a result of the determination by the winning determination means 130. That is, the payout control means 140 has a function as a profit giving means for giving a player a profit based on the stop display of the combination of the predetermined symbols of the reels 21a to 21c. Here, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a predetermined number (for example, 50) of game medals may be stored as electronic information by the game medium storage means 141 provided in the payout control means 140. The game medals stored inside the slot machine 1 are called "credits". When a game medal exceeding the maximum bet number (3 in the present embodiment) is inserted from the medal insertion slot 51 or a game medal is paid out, the payout control means 140 selects the game medal. The game medium storage means 141 stores (stores inside). In addition, when the number of stored game medals (credits) exceeds a predetermined number (50 in the above case), the payout control means 140 operates the hopper motor 70 to pay out the exceeded number of game medals. It is configured to cause the hopper device to perform. Further, the payout control means 140 is configured to cause the hopper device to pay out the betted game medals and the stored game medals (credits) when the settlement button 34 is operated. At this time, the number of reserved game medals and game media storage means 141 bet is zero. The credit amount stored in the gaming medium storage means 141 is displayed at a predetermined position (for example, the upper end portion of the front door 3) of the front surface (the front door 3) of the slot machine 1 (the stored credit The part that displays the number is called "credit display".

(Setting value setting means 150)
The setting value setting unit 150 performs, for example, setting of lottery and payout of the winning combination in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment by the operation of the setting change key switch 36. In the slot machine 1, the power switch 35 is turned on while the setting change key switch 36 is turned on with the power switch 35 turned off, the power is turned on, and the predetermined value is updated by performing a predetermined operation. Alternatively, when the setting change key switch 36 is turned off after the start lever 32 is operated, the setting value is stored in the setting value storage means 151. For example, it is possible to set six setting values from 1 to 6, and the winning combination determination means 110 changes the winning probability of the combination according to the setting value, and thereby the payout of the game medals to be paid out It is configured to change the rate (the payout rate). Therefore, the winning probability shown in FIG. 8 is an example (for example, a value when the setting value is 1). In addition, when the setting value is changed, a part of the information related to the game (such as a gaming state to be described later) is retained, while the other information (such as an internal gaming state to be described later) is initialized. You can also In addition, in the slot machine having the special part, it is possible to configure so that the setting value can not be changed even if the above operation is performed in the special game state. Further, the setting value may not be changed even in the internal game state. Further, the setting may not be changed when the freeze is being performed.

(Playing state control means 160)
The gaming state control means 160 controls the gaming state and the internal gaming state in the slot machine 1 and comprises an RT gaming state control means 161 and an internal gaming state control means 162.

(RT gaming state control means 161)
First, transition of the gaming state will be described. As shown in FIG. 11A, in the initial state as shipped from the factory, the gaming state of the slot machine 1 is changed to the non-RT gaming state (normal gaming state) by the RT gaming state control means 161. In the case of the specification of initializing the gaming state when the setting value is changed, the non-RT gaming state (also referred to as "RAM clear") is performed when the slot machine 1 is powered on and the setting value is changed It becomes normal game state).

  Also, in the non-RT gaming state, any of the above-mentioned winning combination-A1 to A6 and winning combination-B1 to B6 will be won, and a specific symbol on the activated line (one of the specific symbols 01 to 05 shown in FIG. 5) When the stop display is displayed, the gaming state of the slot machine 1 is shifted to the RT1 gaming state by the RT gaming state control means 161. As shown in FIG. 9A, of the six types of pressing order assigned to each of the winning combination -A1 to A6 and the winning combination -B1 to B6, the first stop is the left stop button 33a and the middle stop. Since the correct pressing order is assigned to the button 33b and the right stop button 33c, if the winning order of the winning combination-A1 to A6 and the winning combination-B1 to B6 is not notified, 2 It will be operated in incorrect push order (probable order other than correct push order) with probability of / 3, and as described above, in the case of incorrect push order, specific symbol is effective line with probability of 3/4 Since it is stopped and displayed on the top, when you win any of winning combination-A1-A6 or winning combination-B1-B6, the specific symbol is effective with a probability of 1/2 (= 2/3 x 3/4) Stop display on the line RT1 game It will be migrated to the state.

  When the player is in the RT1 gaming state, the player is elected to any of the re-playing roles-F1 to F5, and when the symbol combination of the re-playing roles 08 is stopped and displayed on the activated line, the RT gaming state control means 161 The gaming state of this slot machine 1 shifts to the RT2 gaming state. As shown in FIG. 8, the replay player combination F1 to F5 is a role to be won when the gaming state is in the RT1 gaming state and the RT4 gaming state, and as shown in FIG. When the stop buttons 33a to 33c are operated in the pressing order indicated by "08" with respect to the winning of F1 to F5, the combination of symbols of the replaying role 08 is stopped and displayed on the activated line. That is, the combination of symbols of the re-play combination 08 is stopped and displayed depending on whether or not the pressing order is displayed in which the combination of symbols of the re-play combination 08 is stopped and displayed for the winning of the re-play combination-F1 to F5. The probabilities are configured to be different.

  Also, when in the RT2 gaming state, if the player wins any of the re-playing combination-C1 to C6 and the combination of symbols of the re-playing combination 03 or the re-playing combination 04 is stopped and displayed on the effective line, the RT game By the state control means 161, the gaming state of this slot machine 1 is shifted to the RT3 gaming state. As shown in FIG. 8, the replay player combination C1 to C6 is a role to be won when the gaming state is in the RT2 gaming state and the RT3 gaming state, and as shown in FIG. When the stop buttons 33a to 33c are operated in the pressing order indicated by "03" and "04" with respect to the wins of C1 to C6, the combination of symbols of Replay role 03 or Replay role 04 is on the effective line Stop display.

  Further, even in the RT3 gaming state, when the player wins any of the re-playing roles-C1 to C6, it informs the pushing order that the combination of the re-playing roles 03 or the re-playing roles 04 symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line. Thus, when the stop buttons 33a to 33c are operated in the pressing order, the symbol combination of the replay player combination 03 or the replay player combination 04 is stopped and displayed on the activated line, and the RT gaming state control unit 161 The gaming state of the slot machine 1 is configured to maintain the RT3 gaming state.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the above-described pushing order bell is won, an AT game is provided to notify the pushing order in which the combination of seven symbol combinations is stopped and displayed on the activated line. The AT game is mainly executed in the RT3 gaming state (as will be described later, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the transition condition to the AT gaming (internal gaming state 3) is established, and the re-game) Although the combination of symbols of the re-playing combination 03 or 04 is stopped and displayed for the winning combination-C1 to C6, the player is notified that the stop button 33a to 33c is pressed in this pressing order, though the pressing order is notified. When not operating (that is, when the RT2 gaming state continues without the transition to the RT3 gaming state), the transition to the internal gaming state 3 and the AT gaming start is configured). Here, the AT game is a game in which the player is notified of an advantageous order of pushing. For example, as in the above-described push order bells (for example, winning combination-A1 to A6 and winning combination-B1 to B6), the correct pressing order (a combination of seven winning combination symbols is effective when the stop buttons 33a to 33c are operated. As described later, the main control unit 100 uses the acquired number display 72 and the effect control unit 301 uses the image display device 41 etc. By notifying (calling "help" or "navi"), it is possible to arrange on the effective line the combination of the symbols of the winning combination 01 or the winning combination 02 for the pushing order bell such as the winning combination-A1 to A6 etc. It provides a game of (7 game medals are paid out as a result). In addition, as described above, when performing AT game, it announces the pushing order for shifting to the RT2 gaming state and the RT3 gaming state at the time of winning of the above-mentioned replaying part, and in the RT3 gaming state, this By informing the pushing order of maintaining the gaming state, the AT game is executed in the RT3 gaming state.

  In addition, in the RT2 gaming state and the RT3 gaming state, the player is elected to any of the re-playing roles-C1 to C6, and the stop buttons 33a to 33 c are pressed in order of stopping combination of symbols of the re-playing roles 02 on the activated line. When is operated, the combination of symbols of replay player combination 02 is stopped and displayed on the activated line, and as a result, the gaming state of this slot machine 1 is shifted to the RT1 gaming state by the RT gaming state control means 161. In addition, even if the winning combination-A1-A6 and winning combination-B1-B6 is won and the specific symbol is stopped and displayed on the activated line without being operated in the correct order, the RT gaming state control means At 161, the gaming state of the slot machine 1 shifts to the RT1 gaming state. Therefore, when the game is being executed in the RT1 gaming state, it is assumed that the stop buttons 33a to 33c are operated in the pressing order to win the replay player and increase the gaming state even though the pressing order is not notified. Also, in the RT2 gaming state or the RT3 gaming state, the RT1 gaming state is obtained against the winning of the above-mentioned re-play combination-C1 to C6 or the winning combination-A1 to A6 and the winning combination-B1 to B6 if not notifying the pushing order. There is a high possibility that the stop buttons 33a to 33c are operated in the order of pushing to the, and basically, the game is executed in the RT1 gaming state. Similarly, when the AT game is ended in the RT3 gaming state, the gaming state is RT1 unless the notification of the pressing order to the replaying role-C1 to C6, the winning combination-A1 to A6, and the winning combination-B1 to B6 is made. It will shift to the gaming state. Therefore, when the AT game is being executed, the "advanting push order" in the AT game described above has been shifted from the RT3 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state (stop against the winning order bell winning) When the buttons 33a to 33c are not operated in the correct order and the specific symbol is stopped and displayed, or for the winning of the re-playing role-C1 to C6, the combination of the re-playing role 03 or 04 is stopped and displayed. Even if the order is notified, the stop buttons 33a to 33c are not operated in this pushing order, and when the combination of symbols of the replay player combination 02 is stopped and displayed on the effective line), it shifts to the RT3 gaming state The notification of the order of pushing is also included. Note that, in the AT game, instead of informing the pressing order, it may be configured to notify information (for example, "Aim for red" etc.) for pushing the eyes.

  Here, the non-RT gaming state, the RT1 gaming state, the RT2 gaming state, and the RT3 gaming state described above are also non-internal gaming states, and “non-internal” refers to when the power is first turned on after factory collection or It refers to the state that has not won the special part as in the clear.

  In the non-RT gaming state, the RT1 gaming state, the RT2 gaming state, and the RT3 gaming state, the winning combination determination unit 110 wins the special role (BB1 to BB3), and in the game, the special role on the activated line of the reels 21a to 21c. If it is determined that the combination of symbols other than the combination of symbols assigned to is stopped and displayed, that is, it is decided not to shift to a special game in the game with respect to the winning of the special part, the gaming state control means 160 will By the state control means 161, the gaming state of the slot machine 1 is shifted to the RT4 gaming state which is the internal middle game state. Here, "inside" is a state in which a special combination is won but a combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination is not arranged on the activated line. In this manner, when transitioning to the RT4 gaming state which is the internal middle game state, the winning combination is carried over until the combination of symbols of the winning special combination is stopped and displayed on the activated line by the special combination carry over means 112 (ie, During the internal gaming state RT4 gaming state is continued). The timing of shifting to the inside may be shifted based on the winning combination determination means 110 winning a special combination. In this normal gaming state (non-RT gaming state, RT1, RT2, RT3 gaming state, and RT4 gaming state (internal playing state)), basically, bets are made as long as AT gaming described later is not executed. The number of is greater than the expected number that can be earned in the game.

  In addition, when the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning special roles (BB1 to BB3) is stopped and displayed on the effective line in the RT4 gaming state, the gaming state of the slot machine 1 is special by the RT gaming state control means 161. Transition to the game state. In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the BB1 or BB2 is won and the RT4 gaming state (internal playing state) is shifted to, and the winning combination of symbols BB1 or BB2 is stopped on the effective line When it is displayed, it shifts to the RT5-12 gaming state, and is won BB3 to shift to the RT4 gaming state (internal playing state), and the combination of the symbols of the BB3 winning is stopped and displayed on the effective line. When the game is made, it is configured to shift to the RT5-3 gaming state (hereinafter, the RT5-12 gaming state and the RT5-3 gaming state are collectively referred to as "RT5 gaming state"). In the RT5 gaming state, a game advantageous to the player (special game) is executed until a predetermined end condition is satisfied. Here, with the predetermined end condition, as described above, for example, in the RT5 gaming state (RT5-12 gaming state or RT5-3 gaming state), game medals of a predetermined number or more are paid out to the player (For example, when the number of sheets over which BB1 is 334, BB2 is 238, and BB3 is over 60) is paid out. When the predetermined termination condition is satisfied in the RT5 gaming state (RT5-12 gaming state or RT5-3 gaming state), the RT gaming state control means 161 causes the gaming state of the slot machine 1 to be the non-RT gaming state. Migrate to

  In any of the game states, a predetermined number of game medals are paid out by the payout control means 140 when the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed on the activated line (winning) Replay is executed when a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is won on the activated line by winning the replay role). Further, the above description of the gaming state is an example, and the present invention is not limited to the transition of the gaming state. For example, the game state may be shifted by stopping and displaying the combination of symbols of the winning combination on the effective line, or a game state transition symbol (payout of gaming medals different from the winning combination on the effective line The game state may be shifted by stopping and displaying a combination of symbols that are not subject to the provision of re-playing.

(Internal gaming state control means 162)
Next, transition of the internal gaming state will be described. In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in addition to the gaming state, the internal gaming state control means 162 is configured to manage an effect state (specifically, an AT game) that affects the number of game medals to be paid out. ing. The AT game in the conventional gaming machine has been managed by the sub control means 200, but the action of modifying the sub control means 200 illegally is made, or by injecting an illegal command to the sub control means 200, it is forced There was a possibility that it would be AT game. Further, it has been requested to be managed by the main control means 100 whether or not to execute a game that affects the number of game medals such as the AT game. Therefore, the main control means 100 is configured to manage by a plurality of internal gaming states as shown in FIG. 11 (b).

  First, at normal time such as at the time of factory shipment, the internal gaming state control means 162 causes the internal gaming state of the slot machine 1 to be the internal gaming state 0 (normal). Then, in the internal gaming state 0, when an AT lottery to be described later is won, the leading gaming number is determined by the internal gaming state control means 162, and the internal gaming state of the slot machine 1 is the internal gaming state 1 (predictive) Migrate to This prognostic game number is determined by lottery in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, but may be configured to set a predetermined game number. In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the internal gaming state 0 (for example, when the player is elected to the rare combination having a low probability of winning among the winning combinations), Although the AT lottery is configured to be performed, it may be configured to perform a lottery every game (for example, to perform a lottery with a probability taking into consideration a winning combination etc.).

  The internal gaming state 1 is a omen of AT gaming, and when the number of omens of the above mentioned gaming is executed in the internal gaming state 1, the internal gaming state of the slot machine 1 is determined by the internal gaming state control means 162. , Transition to the internal gaming state 2 (AT preparation). Further, in the internal gaming state 2, the main control means 100 shifts the above-mentioned gaming state from the RT1 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state in order to execute AT gaming. That is, the main control unit 100 displays the internal gaming state 2 by the number-of-ears display 72, as described later with respect to the winning of the push order bell and push order replay described above, or the sub control means 200 (effect control By displaying on the image display device 42 via the means 301), the correct pressing order (if it is a winning combination-A1-A6, if it is a winning combination-B1-B6, it is a pressing order not to shift to the RT1 gaming state If the game combination-C1-C6, re-game combination-F1-F5, it is a state of preparation of AT game to notify the RT3 gaming state or push order to maintain this RT3 gaming state). However, when the gaming state is the non-RT gaming state, in order to shift to the RT1 gaming state, the correct answer is pushed for the winning of the pushing order bell (winning combination-A1 to A6, winning combination-B1 to B6) The order is not notified (as described above, to shift to the RT1 transition state when the specific symbol is stopped and displayed). In this internal gaming state 2, only the pushing order Replay and pushing order bell's pushing order regarding the transition of the playing state is informed, and if there is a pushing order replay or pushing order bell not related to the transition of the game state, The pushing order may be configured not to notify, or the pushing order may be notified. Then, the internal gaming state control means 162 is a condition that can shift to the AT game, that is, if the current gaming state after all the reels 21a to 21c are stopped is the RT3 gaming state, the AT gaming can be performed Shift to a certain internal gaming state 3 (AT). In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a predetermined number of games (for example, 50 games) are set for one AT game, but a lottery or the like is performed at the time of winning the AT lottery or at the start of AT execution. The number of AT games may be determined.

  In the internal gaming state 3, the above-described push order replay (replay role-C1 to C6 (when the game state has shifted to RT1 gaming state, the replay role-F1 to F5)) and the push order bell (winning role-A1 The correct pressing order (replay role-C1 to C6, replay role-F1 to F5) is made to shift to the RT3 gaming state or to this RT3 game in response to the winning of the winning combination-A6, winning combination-B1 to B6) It is a push order to maintain the state, and the player is given AT game by notifying the combination of symbols of 7 cards in combination for the winning combinations -A1 to A6 and the winning combinations -B1 to B6. Can be provided. In addition, when a game of a predetermined number of games is executed in internal gaming state 3, internal gaming state control means 162 determines whether AT is stocked, and when there is stock of AT, internal gaming state 1 , And when there is no stock of AT, it shifts to the internal gaming state 0. In addition, when there is stock of AT, 1 is set to the precursor game number, and it shifts to internal gaming state 1 (ie, it will shift to internal gaming state 2 after 1 game in internal gaming state 1) . In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as described later, the AT gaming right is provided and stocked also in the internal gaming states 3, 5, and 7.

  In addition, when the special role (BB1 to BB3) is won in internal gaming state 0, the internal gaming state of this slot machine 1 is shifted to internal gaming state 4 (BB preparation) by internal gaming state control means 162. . The internal gaming state 4 is a preparation state for special games, and is configured to continue until a combination of symbols of the winning special roles (BB1 to BB3) is stopped and displayed on the activated line. Then, when the combination of symbols of special roles (BB1 to BB3) is stopped and displayed on the effective line, the internal gaming state control unit 162 causes the internal gaming state of the slot machine 1 to be in the special gaming state (internal gaming state The state is shifted to the internal gaming state 5 (BB), in which the probability of winning the AT lottery and the stocking of the AT becomes larger than in the state 0). Furthermore, when the special game ending condition is satisfied, the internal gaming state control means 162 determines whether or not the above-mentioned AT is stocked, and shifts to the internal gaming state 2 when the AT is stocked, When AT is not stocked, it shifts to internal gaming state 0.

  On the other hand, in the internal gaming state 1, internal gaming state 2 and internal gaming state 3, if the special combination (BB1 to BB3) mentioned above is won, the combination of the symbols corresponding to the special part won is not stopped and displayed on the effective line. The internal gaming state control unit 162 shifts the internal gaming state of the slot machine 1 to the internal gaming state 6 (over specialization preparation). The internal gaming state 6 is also a preparation state for special games, and is configured to continue until the combination of symbols of the winning special roles (BB1 to BB3) is stopped and displayed on the activated line. Then, when the combination of symbols of special roles (BB1 to BB3) is stopped and displayed on the effective line, the internal gaming state of this slot machine 1 is displayed by the internal gaming state control means 162 as the internal gaming state 7 (add special Transition to the) (However, when the special game is won in the internal game state 1, the internal game state 2 and the internal game state 3 and the symbol combination of the special part in the game is stopped and displayed, the internal game state 6 It does not shift, it shifts to internal game state 7). The internal gaming state 7 is a state in which more AT games can be added (this is called "additional specialization"). For example, the AT lottery is won by the AT lottery than in the internal gaming state 5 The probability of being stocked is configured to be greater in the internal gaming state 7. Also in the internal gaming state 7, when the internal gaming state control means 162 satisfies the termination condition of the special game, it is judged whether or not the AT described above is stocked, and when the AT is stocked, the internal gaming state It shifts to state 2 and when AT is not stocked, it shifts to internal gaming state 0, but in this embodiment, when it shifts from internal gaming state 6 to internal gaming state 7, AT is always stocked Therefore, there is no transition to the internal gaming state 0. In addition, when it is elected special role (BB1-BB3) in internal game state 1, it moves to internal game state 4 (when the combination of the symbol of the special part in the particular game is stopped indication it moves to internal game state 5 May be configured.

  In the above description, the internal gaming state 2 is configured to "transition to the internal gaming state 3 if the current gaming state after all the reels 21a to 21c is stopped is the RT3 gaming state". Although the case has been described, it is also possible to configure so as to shift to the internal gaming state 3 upon transitioning from the RT2 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state. Here, when the internal gaming state 3 is ended, if there is stock of AT, the AT gaming can be executed from the internal gaming state 2 which is the preparation state of the AT game through the precursor state which is the internal gaming state 1 It shifts to a certain internal gaming state 3. In this case, the RT3 gaming state in the previous AT game may be continuing. Therefore, in the internal gaming state 2, when it is configured to shift to the internal gaming state 3 triggered by the transition from the RT2 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state, when already in the RT3 gaming state, the gaming state once RT1 gaming Shift to the state and when winning combination-A1 to A6, winning combination-B1 to B6 or replaying role-C1 to C6 is won, do not notify the correct pressing order, or a pressing order other than the correct pressing order Informing), it is necessary to shift to the RT3 gaming state again through the RT2 gaming state, and the period to shift to the internal gaming state 3 in which the AT gaming can be performed will be long.

  In addition, in internal gaming state 2, when it is RT2 gaming state, when it is elected by the re-playing role-C1-C6 which shifts the gaming state to RT3 gaming state, in order to make RT3 gaming state shift, the re-playing role The pushing order is notified that the combination of the symbols of 03 or Replay part 04 is stopped and displayed, but in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the player disregards the information and stops in different pushing order in the pushing order. Even when 33c is operated, it is configured to shift from the internal gaming state 2 to the internal gaming state 3. Alternatively, in the internal gaming state 2, when the gaming state is shifted to the RT2 gaming state, the internal gaming state 3 may be shifted to start the AT gaming. In this case, as a push order notification in the AT game, in the RT2 gaming state, a push order to shift the gaming state to the RT3 gaming state is notified (when the replay combination-C1 to C6 is won, the replay combination 03 or the replay It is possible to shift to the RT3 gaming state by notifying the pressing order in which the combination of the symbols of the role 04 is stopped and displayed.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the AT game lottery (AT lottery) is executed when the operation of the start lever 32 is received by the main control means 100, but all the reels 21a to 21c are You may comprise so that it may perform by the process after stopping.

-Modification of management of internal gaming state-
In addition to the management of the internal gaming state described above, the internal gaming state may be managed by the “non-advantage zone (normal zone)”, the “standby zone”, and the “advantage zone”. Specifically, in the advantageous section, the upper limit (for example, 1500 games) of the stayable game period (the number of games) is determined, and processing (for example, winning) concerning the advantageous game (AT game) is performed only in the advantageous section. The notification of the order of pressing by the number display 72 and the image display device 41 and the lottery (for example, the additional lottery) can be performed. On the other hand, although it is possible to determine whether or not to shift to the advantageous section (for example, AT lottery) in the non-favorable section, it is not possible to perform processing and lottery related to the advantageous game (AT game). Therefore, when the game period in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit, it is possible to prevent the advantageous game (AT game) from being continued by shifting to the non- advantageous section. In addition, in the non-advantage zone, when it is determined to shift to the advantageous zone, in principle, the next game is shifted to the advantageous zone. In addition, as a trigger for determining whether or not to shift to the advantageous section (standby section) (lottery drawing transition to the advantageous section), and as a trigger for the lottery regarding the advantageous game (AT game), there is a setting difference (winning probability by setting value It may be limited to the winning of the part without a difference of. Although the setting value determines the degree of advantage in the first place, in the conventional gaming machine, when the setting value is high, advantageous gaming (AT gaming) is likely to be continued (it is easy to win the additional lottery), and the setting value is advantageous in the first place if the setting value is low. It is difficult to play a game (AT game) (it is difficult to win the AT lottery), and even if the advantageous game (AT game) is executed, it ends immediately (it is difficult to win the extra lottery) It was a thing. Therefore, with regard to the advantageous game (AT game), it is possible to provide a suitable advantageous game (AT game) by not providing a difference depending on the set value. In addition, in the game in which the transition to the advantageous section is determined in the non-advantage section, the standby section can be shifted when the special winning combination (for example, BB1) is won and the internal middle game state is established. When the internal middle game state ends in this standby section, the transition to the advantageous section is made. Incidentally, even in the standby section, it is not possible to perform processing and lottery relating to the advantageous game (AT game). In addition, as described above, when transitioning to the advantageous section, when the number of games in this advantageous section reaches the upper limit of the game period (the number of games) that can stay, even if the special game is being executed, it is not Transition to the advantageous section (processing and lottery related to the advantageous game (AT game) is not executed). In the conventional gaming machine, even if the AT lottery is won, it does not notify immediately, so there are many players who stop the game despite the AT lottery being won. In particular, this tendency was often seen by players who are beginners. Therefore, when the transition to the advantageous section is decided, the bet for the next game can be made from the decided time until the bet for the next game becomes possible (the operation of the settlement button 34 becomes possible) When it is determined that it is possible to operate the start lever 32 (until the settlement button 34 can be operated), it may be notified that it is an advantageous section from the next game. Then, this notification may be realized, for example, by turning on a segment dp of a 7-segment display (having a segment a to a segment g and a segment dp) such as the acquired number indicator 72 or the stored number indicator. When stopping the game, in order to confirm the number of stored sheets before operating the checkout button 34 (because there is no need to operate the checkout button 34 if there is no stored number), it is provided in the stored number indicator or in the vicinity thereof You will always look at the number-of-acquisitions indicator 72. In other words, if the DP segment is turned on before the settlement button 34 can be operated, the game is stopped without notice even though the transition to the advantageous section is decided. It can be considered that the number of persons can be reduced. By the way, it is possible to turn on the DP segment before all reels stop (for example, when the start lever is operated), but in this case, the player's interest always turns to only the DP segment Since (the interest in the image display device 41 and the reels 21 is reduced), it is preferable to turn on after all the reels 21 have stopped (after the last stop button 33 has been operated).

(Freeze control means 170)
The freeze control means 170 performs freeze effect to delay the control of disabling the progress of the game in a predetermined period (temporarily stopping) or stopping the lottery result when the predetermined condition is satisfied. That is, the freeze control means 170 has a function as a lottery means for performing a lottery for executing a freeze effect.

  As the “freeze effect” for temporarily stopping the progress of the game for a predetermined period and delaying it, for example, the acceptance of the game medium (game medal), the operation of the bet button 31 for determining the betted number of game media credited in advance Accepting, accepting the operation of start lever 32 to start the game, or accepting the stop operation of reels 21a to 21c (accepting the operation of stop button 33a to 33c) Can be mentioned.

  Further, as the freeze effect, all the functions related to the progress of the game may be paused, or only some of the functions may be paused.

  As an aspect of temporarily stopping the progress of the game, the control processing based on the operation of the player (the process of detecting the insertion of gaming media by the passage sensor (the first and second insertion sensors 61 and 62) and the operation of the bet button 31) Based on the bet number setting process, the reel rotation process or the combination lottery process based on the operation of the start lever 32, and the reel stop process based on the operation of the stop buttons 33a to 33c are not performed.

  When an input signal based on the player's operation is issued during a period in which the progress of the game is suspended due to the freeze effect, the control process based on the input signal is not performed, the input signal is not accepted, the input signal By performing processing such as delaying transmission of a predetermined period of time, the end timing in one game is delayed compared to the case where freeze rendering is not performed.

  Regarding the freeze effect performed based on the operation of the start lever 32, when the start lever 32 is operated, the reels 21a to 21c are rotated after the predetermined period has elapsed without rotating the reels 21a to 21c for a predetermined period. When or when the start lever 32 is operated, the combination lottery and rotation of the reels 21a to 21c are not performed for a predetermined period, and the combination lottery and rotation of the reels 21a to 21c are performed after the predetermined period, or the start lever 32 When the reels 21a to 21c are rotated after the lapse of a predetermined period while the reels 21a to 21c are not rotated but the reels 21a to 21c are rotated after the predetermined period has been operated, or the symbol lottery is performed. After being performed, a predetermined period is set, and the reels 21a to 21c may be rotated or stopped during the predetermined period.

  Regarding the freeze effect performed based on the operation of the stop button 33a to 33c, as a result of the freeze effect performed based on the reception of the operation of the stop button 33a to 33c and the operation of the stop button 33a to 33c, a specific symbol is the reel 21a. The control process of the freeze effect is different in the freeze effect performed based on the stop display on 21c. Further, whether or not the freeze effect is generated may be determined according to the pressing order (operation mode) of the stop buttons 33a to 33c.

  The control process of the freeze effect performed based on the reception of the operation of the stop buttons 33a to 33c includes that the stop control process of the rotating reels 21a to 21c is not performed. As a result, in the predetermined period, the player can not stop the rotating reels 21a to 21c, but since the predetermined period has elapsed, the stop control processing after the reception processing of the operation of the stop buttons 33a to 33c is performed. The timing from the stop acceptance to the reel stop can be delayed.

  Among the stop buttons 33a to 33c, the control process of the freeze effect performed based on the fact that a specific symbol is stopped and displayed on the reels 21a to 21c as a result of the operation of the stop buttons 33a to 33c is other than the last stop button When a specific symbol is displayed stopped on the effective line by the operation of the stop button, stop control of the stop button to be stopped next is not performed, and the specific symbol is displayed stopped on the reel by the operation of the last stop button If the bet number setting process based on the operation of the bet button 31 to start the next game, the insertion detection process of game media by the passage sensor, or the combination of symbols of replay (replay) is on the effective line The control process based on the automatic bet number setting process performed when the game is stopped may not be performed.

  Although the game progress control based on the player's operation is temporarily stopped for a predetermined period during which the freeze effect is performed, the operation of the gaming machine can be performed regardless of the progress of the game. For example, although the stop control process based on the operation of the stop buttons 33a to 33c is not performed, the rotation mode of the reels 21a to 21c can be set arbitrarily.

  As a rotation mode of the reels 21a to 21c in a predetermined period, rotating the reels 21a to 21c in the direction opposite to the normal rotation, rotating the reels 21a to 21c by a predetermined number of symbols and stopping a specific symbol combination, plural Of the reels 21a to 21c, the predetermined reel is stopped and the other reels are rotated, the rotation speed of the reels 21a to 21c is changed, or the reels 21a to 21c are operated by the player. It is possible to change the operation of 21c.

  The predetermined period for performing the freeze effect can be changed in accordance with a predetermined condition (a player's operation, a lottery, etc.). Here, the predetermined condition includes detection of a signal based on an operation by the player (the start lever 32, the bet button 31, the stop button 33a to 33c, and the checkout button 32) and a predetermined result by lottery. In addition, changing may include shortening or prolonging the paused period.

  As control processing for shortening the period of the paused state, for example, the period of the paused state may be forcibly ended, or rewriting to a period shorter than the period of the paused state may be mentioned. And as control processing which lengthens the period of a pause state, adding another period after the period of a pause state or rewriting to a period longer than the period of a pause state is mentioned. In addition, the period of the pause state based on the freeze effect may not be determined for the maximum time, and may be continued until a certain result is obtained based on the operation of the player.

  The period of the pause state in which the freeze effect is performed may be set after the elapse of the wait period, or may be set including the wait period. If the wait period is included, it is determined whether or not the freeze effect is ended during the wait period, and if it is ended, the mode of setting the freeze effect period after the weight period There is an aspect of resuming. Alternatively, such a determination process can be omitted by providing a freeze effect period longer than the weight period in advance.

  As the freeze effect, it is possible to perform a pseudo game freeze effect as if it is progressing a normal game (also referred to simply as "pseudo game" in the following description). In the pseudo game freeze effect, a freeze effect period is defined between start lever reception processing based on the operation of the start lever 32 and rotation start processing of the reels 21a to 21c, and during the freeze effect period, normal play Thus, reel rotation control is performed based on the operation of the start lever 32, and reel stop control is performed based on the operation of the stop buttons 33a to 33c. However, the winning combination lottery process based on the operation of the start lever 32 and the winning determination process or the payout control process based on the operation of the stop buttons 33a to 33c are not performed.

  In the pseudo game freeze effect, a motion (swinging up and down at a timing when the stop buttons 33a to 33c are operated, a timing when a specific reel rotates among the reels 21a to 21c, or a timing when all reels stop) Fluctuation) may be performed. This makes it possible to suggest whether the game is a normal game (hereinafter referred to as "the main game") or a pseudo game freeze effect.

  The freeze effect is configured to end when a predetermined period has elapsed. However, if a predetermined operation (operation of the start lever 32 and the stop buttons 33a to 33c) is performed before the predetermined period elapses, it is also possible to configure such that the freeze effect can be canceled. Moreover, it is also possible to configure to determine whether or not the freeze effect is to be executed only for a predetermined period before the predetermined period elapses. In addition, depending on the state of the reels 21a to 21c when the freeze effect is finished, when the reels 21a to 21c are started to be rotated from this state, the operation of the stop buttons 33a to 33c is stopped to stop the reels 21a to 21c. Therefore, the rotation start time of all the reels 21a to 21c can be randomly changed (that is, the rotation start order of the reels 21a to 21c randomly changes after the freeze effect). . Alternatively, it is possible to configure the rotation start processing of the reels 21a to 21c when the freeze effect is not performed and the rotation start processing of the reels 21a to 21c after the freeze effect is performed to be different. Further, when the reels 21a to 21c are rotated and stopped in the freeze effect, the positions of the symbols on the reels 21a to 21c are returned to the state before the freeze effect is performed, and the rotation is started from there. be able to.

(Operation order determination means 175)
The operation order determination unit 175 acquires the operation order (pushing order) of the stop buttons 33a to 33c in the game in which the above-described pushing order bell and pushing order replay are won, and determines whether or not the pushing order is assigned to the winning combination. It is a means to judge. Based on the determination result, determination of stop symbols of the reels 21a to 21c by the reel control means 120 and transition of the freeze state are performed.

(External signal transmission means 180)
The external signal transmission unit 180 outputs information about a game through the external concentrated terminal board 80 connected to the main control unit 100. Here, the information about the game includes information when the start lever 32 is operated, information of inserted game medals and paid game medals, and a combination of specific symbols (for example, "red 7-red 7-red 7) is information etc. when displayed on the activated line, and is information for displaying the number of games or the start of the bonus game on the external device based on the information (or managing). For example, the number of games can be displayed by the information when the start lever 32 is operated, and the difference number can be displayed from the difference between the inserted game medal and the paid-out game medal. In addition, the number of bonus can be displayed by the information when the specific symbol is displayed on the activated line. Specific processing will be described later.

(Control command transmission means 185)
The control command transmission unit 185 is a unit for transmitting a control command for transmitting the information of the main control unit 100 to the sub control unit 200. The sub control means 200 is configured to determine the aspect and the execution timing of the effect based on the control command transmitted from the main control means 100, as described later. The same command may be transmitted twice in order to prevent the control command from being dropped by the sub control unit 200 or the like.

(Second random number generation means 190)
The main control means 100 has a second random number generation means 190 for updating the random number value generated by the main control means 100. The random number generated by the second random number generator 190 is a 2-byte random number and is also called a soft random number. The second random number generation means 190 is configured such that the soft random number update process S5570 is executed and the value is updated each time the interrupt process S570 described later is executed. In the soft random number update process S5570, the game progress main process S550 is performed until the start lever 32 is operated after the start of the game and all reels after the reels 21a to 21c start rotating. It is configured to be executed even before stopping. Thus, by updating the soft random numbers in the loop process in the game progress main process S550 as well as the interrupt process S570, the update timing and the number of times of the soft random numbers in the game progress main process S550 described later The random number value generated by the second random number generation means 190 because it changes under the influence of the operation of the character (because the number of times the soft random number is updated in one unit game changes with the operation timing of the player, etc.) The randomness of (soft random numbers) can be secured.

(Notice of push order by main control means 100)
As described above, in the winning combinations-A1 to A6 and the winning combinations-B1 to B6, the number of game medals that can be obtained changes in the order of pressing the stop buttons 33a to 33c. Also, since the replaying state is transferred by the replaying roles C1 to C6 and the replaying role-F1 to F5 by the pressing order of the stop buttons 33a to 33c, the number of game medals that can be obtained as a result is affected. Therefore, when notifying the pressing order of these pressing orders, not only the notification by the image display device 41 via the effect control means 301 but also notifying by the main control means 100 ( For example, when the image display device 41 breaks down, it is possible to play only the main control means 100). Specifically, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the acquired number indicator 72 for displaying the number of acquired game medals is configured to notify the pressing order. Here, the acquired number display 72 in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment is, for example, a seven-segment display shown in FIG. 12A, and although not shown in FIG. Are placed on the front side of the The seven-segment display is composed of seven segments (light emitters) and can display at least numbers 0-9.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, for the three stop buttons 33a to 33c, (left middle right), (left and right middle), (middle left and right), (middle right left), (right left left) Middle), (right, middle, left) six pressing orders, and a total of three pressing orders when the first stop is the left stop button 33a, the middle stop button 33b, and the right stop button 33c There are nine push orders. Therefore, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the winning combination is won, one digit of the acquired number display 72 is used (the acquired number display 72 in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment). As shown in FIG. 12 (b), the number of two digits can be displayed, and the above-mentioned pressing order is notified by displaying the numbers 1 to 9) using the 1st digit display). (Including the case of not notifying). In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, an instruction number indicating the pressing order is assigned to the combination to which the pressing order is assigned. The means 301 is configured to determine the pressing order to be displayed on the image display device 41 in an effect manner. FIG. 13 (a) shows the correspondence between the condition device number of the winning combination to which the pushing order is assigned and the instruction number, and FIG. 13 (b) shows the instruction number and the number of obtained sheets indicator 72 and the instruction content to the image display device 41. Indicates For example, because the replay device combination C1 with the condition device number “3” is the pushing order notified “left middle right”, the instruction number is “A1”, and the winning number display 72 is “1”. Is displayed on the image display device 41, and “1 · 2 · 3” is displayed. In addition, since the replay device combination-F5 with the condition device number “17” is the pushing order to be notified is either “right-left middle” or “right-middle left”, the instruction number is “A5” or “A6”. Thus, “5” or “6” is displayed on the acquired number display 72, and “2.3.1” or “3.2.1” is displayed on the image display device 41. As described above, when there are two or more correct answering orders, the main control means 100 selects the instruction number by drawing the instruction number or selecting an instruction number different from the instruction number previously displayed for the corresponding part. Is configured to determine. In addition, an instruction number “A7” (whose instruction content is (1....)) Is assigned to the winning combination -A1, A2, B1, B2 in which the first stop of the correct push sequence is the left stop button 33a. The instruction number “A8” (whose instruction content is (− ·····)) is assigned to the winning combination − A3, A4, B3, B4 in which the first stop of the correct push sequence is the middle stop button 33 b. The instruction number "A9" (the instruction content is (----1)) is assigned to the winning combination-A5, A6, B5, B6 in which the first stop of the correct push sequence is the right stop button 33c. Be In addition, when winning a combination that does not have the pressing order, it has the pressing order, but does not affect the number of game medals that can be acquired by the pressing order (for example, re-play combination-D1 to D3), and the pressing order When the internal gaming state is not to notify the, the instruction number is "A0". In FIG. 13B, the instruction content of the number-of-acquisitions display 72 when the instruction number is “A0” is “no display”, but “0” may be displayed. .

  Here, on the display of the acquired number display 72, the information on the order of pressing is indicated by the instruction number so that it can be determined whether the player is displaying the number of obtained or the information on order of pressing. When displaying, as shown in FIG. 12 (b), it is configured to display a predetermined symbol (for example, two lines obtained by emitting the segment d and the segment g) on the seven-segment display of tens place. There is. At this time, two lines are displayed for the push order bell so that it is possible to determine whether it is the push order information for the push order bell or the push order information for the push order replay, and for the push order replay, Different symbols may be displayed, such as displaying three lines (for example, emitting segments a, d and g). Note that a dedicated display may be provided instead of the acquired number display 72, and the display is not limited to the 7-segment display, and other display media may be used. For example, a plurality of LED indicators may be provided, and the above-described instruction content may be displayed by the lighting pattern. Further, instead of the instruction number, the above-mentioned winning number (conditional device number) may be directly displayed, or may be displayed using a symbol that can be displayed by a 7-segment display. Further, the information (numbers or characters) displayed on the acquired number display 72 may be changed according to the operation of the stop buttons 33a to 33c. Specifically, when the instruction number is "A1", "1" is displayed when the star lever 32 is operated, and "2" is displayed when the left stop button 33a is operated in the first stop. In order to display "3" when the middle stop button 33b is operated at the second stop, the left reel 21a, the middle reel 21b, and the right reel 21c are associated with "1", "2", and "3". It may be configured to indicate the reel to be operated next (when the right stop button 33b is operated at the third stop, the display is erased).

  In principle, the display (instruction display) of the information regarding the pressing order is performed from when the start lever 32 is operated until the reels 21a to 21c reach constant speed rotation (operation acceptance of the stop buttons 33a to 33c becomes valid). Preferably to be performed. Further, it is preferable that the instruction display by the image display device 41 is performed after the instruction display by the acquired number display 72 is performed. Thereby, when an incorrect instruction number is transmitted from the main control unit 100 or an instruction corresponding to an instruction number different from the instruction number received from the main control unit 100 by the sub control unit 200 (effect control unit 301) is issued. Even in this case, since the instruction display by the acquired number display 72 is already performed, it is noticed that the instruction display differs between the main control means 100 and the sub control means 200, and such Even in this case, if the instruction display by the winning number display 72 is followed, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

  The instruction display may be performed before the reels 21a to 21c reach constant-speed rotation after the reel effect (the freeze effect described above and the like) is finished. In addition, after the reels 21a to 21c start rotating, instruction display may be performed before the reels 21a to 21c reach constant speed rotation. Further, the instruction display may be performed at the same time when the reels 21a to 21c reach the constant speed rotation. In addition, after the instruction display by the image display device 41 is performed, the instruction display by the acquisition number display 72 may be performed, or the instruction display by the acquisition number display 72 and the instruction display by the image display device 41 simultaneously. It may be done. Further, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the instruction display on the obtained number display 72 is configured to be cleared after winning determination (the number of obtained numbers is displayed after clearing), but the third stop is performed. It may be cleared after the reception or after stopping all the cylinders. In the above description, the instruction display is from the time when the start lever 32 is operated to the time when the reels 21a to 21c reach the constant speed rotation, but after the start lever 32 of the previous game is operated, When the time until the start lever 32 of this game is operated is less than the minimum game time, even after the start lever 32 is operated, the instruction is not displayed immediately, but the minimum The instruction may be displayed after the game time has elapsed (after the next minimum game time has been set). By doing this, it is possible to eliminate the inconvenience that the stop buttons 33a to 33c can not be operated easily even though the instruction display is made.

  The display of the information regarding the pressing order by the number-of-acquisitions display 72 is continued by the operation of the player (for each operation of the stop buttons 33a to 33c) without changing the display contents and displaying the instruction number. The display contents are changed by the operation of the player. Specifically, the display (for example, “1 · 2 · 3”) described above is displayed on the image display device 41 by the time reception of the stop buttons 33a to 33c is started, and the stop buttons 33a to 33c are operated. Every time the display for the operated stop button changes (the number for the stop button disappears or the display becomes dark). Therefore, even if the player has made a mistake in the operation order on the way, the display by the obtained number display 72 continues to display the instruction number until the last stop button operation is accepted (the display is not interrupted). The display by the image display device 41 does not display the push order navigation (stops the display or displays that the operation is performed in an order different from the instructed push order). Here, the reason that display by the image display device 41 is not performed is that other effects (failure effects) can be performed. Of course, if the player misjudges the order of operations on the way, not only the display by the image display device 41 but also the display by the winning number display 72 may be interrupted. However, in this case, it is preferable that the display by the image display device 41 is interrupted first, and then the display by the acquired number display 72 is interrupted. By doing this, it is possible to eliminate the situation where only the image display device 41 is displayed. In addition, even when the player misjudges the operation order in the middle, the display by the image display device 41 may not be interrupted.

(Transmission of information on the winning combination from the main control unit 100 to the sub control unit 200)
As described later, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the winning combination determined by the winning combination determination unit 110 is sub-controlled from the main control unit 100 for the effect by the sub control unit 200 (effect control unit 301). It is desirable to send to the means 200. However, if the condition device number indicating the winning combination can be specified, the correct touch order can also be specified. Therefore, in the case of the configuration in which the condition device number is transmitted to the sub control means 200, an illegal act (for example, the main control means 100) The act of injecting an illegal control command imitating the control command transmitted to the sub control means 200 from the above, the act of extracting the condition device number and illegitimately specifying the correct pressing order, the unauthorized remodeling action of the sub control means 200, etc. When executed, the main control means 100 has not won the AT game lottery (internal gaming state where an instruction display can be generated (for example, internal gaming states 2 to 3, 6 to 6 shown in FIG. 11 (b) Despite not being 7), there is a possibility that the correct pressing order may be specified illegally, or the display by the image display device 41 may be performed by the sub control means 200. Therefore, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the main control means 100 performs mask processing (a process for making it impossible to specify information on the correct pressing order) on the condition device number, and the information (masked condition device) The number is referred to as “effect group number”, and is configured to be sent to the sub control means 200 instead of the condition device number. With this configuration, the sub control unit 200 can determine the effect based on the information (effect group number) after the mask processing, even if the condition device number is not sent. Of course, not all the conditional device numbers need to be masked, and the following exceptions may be accepted.

(1) Condition device numbers of special roles (BB1 to BB3) (2) Condition device numbers of replays having no influence on withdrawal balls by pushing order (for example, replay role not affecting the transition of gaming state) (3) Pressing order The condition device number that does not make a difference in the number of acquisitions depending on the device number (4) The number of acquisitions is small (for example, less than the specified number) Condition device number (5) (3) and (4)

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the condition device number is masked and transmitted to the sub control means 200 regardless of whether or not the AT game has been won, but the AT game is transmitted. The condition device number is sent directly to the secondary control means 200 in an internal gaming state where an instruction display can be generated, for example, when an AT gaming lottery has not been won (eg, In the internal gaming state in which no instruction display occurs, the condition device number may be masked and transmitted to the sub control unit 200.

  Here, the mask process of the condition device number will be described with reference to FIG. 14 and FIG. Here, FIG. 14 is an explanatory view for explaining an example of the mask processing, and FIG. 15 is an explanatory view for explaining a modified example of the mask processing. In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the condition device number includes the type of role (replay role, type of winning combination (bell, watermelon), etc.), the type of effect (even in the same replay role, regarding the transition of the gaming state) Role play, weak cherries, strong cherries, etc.) Grouping is done by the influence to the game by pushing order (for example, the re-playing part who has an influence on the withdrawal by pushing order like one of the condition device numbers 3 to 8 is one group As in the condition device numbers 9 to 11, the replay players who do not influence the balls by the pushing order are divided into different groups) and managed by the table shown in FIG. Then, instead of using the condition device number that has been won, the effect group number is determined using this table, and by transmitting the determined effect group number to the sub control means 200, it can not be identified which condition device number has won. It is like that. As a result, the pressing order of the correct answer can not be specified. Since the type of role and the type of effect can be specified, the secondary control means 200 can determine the effect according to the winning combination even if the condition device number is not sent. For example, in FIG. 14, when the condition device number is elected to the role of 3 to 8 (replay role-C1 to C6), "3" is transmitted from the main control means 100 to the sub control means 200 as the effect group number Therefore, even if it is possible to specify that the effect group number is “3”, it is not possible to specify which role is won or the correct pressing order, but the effect according to the re-play role is It can be decided.

  Here, instead of converting the condition device number into the effect group number, as shown in FIG. 15, the condition device number is divided into the above-mentioned groupings, and the winning condition device number is rewritten to a common number for each group, It is also possible to make it impossible to specify which conditional device number has been won by transmitting the number after rewriting to the sub control means 200. FIG. 15 shows the case where a number which does not overlap with the condition device number assigned to the winning combination is assigned to the group. For example, when the condition device number is elected to the role of 3 to 8 (replay role-C1 to C6), the condition device number is converted to "56". By configuring in this way, it is possible not to specify the correct touch order.

  Since it is not necessary to basically refer to the information after the masking process by the main control means 100, it is preferable to transmit the information after the masking process immediately before transmitting it to the sub control means 200. This is because it is not necessary to separately provide an area to store information after the mask processing until the secondary control means 200 is sent. Of course, mask processing may be performed prior to transmission.

  In addition, if the mask process is performed in this way, the sub control unit 200 can not determine the correct pressing order from the effect group number (or the converted condition device number), but the instruction number described above is transmitted separately Therefore, the sub control unit 200 can specify the correct touch order from the instruction number. In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when in the internal gaming state (internal gaming states 2 to 3, 6 to 7) capable of generating an instruction display, the instruction number (A1 to A9) corresponding to the condition device number Is transmitted to the sub control means 200, and in the internal gaming state (internal gaming states 0 to 1, 5 to 6) in which no instruction display occurs, "A0" is transmitted as the instruction number. Further, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, it is defined for each internal gaming state whether or not it is an internal gaming state in which an instruction display can be generated. Thereby, the main control means 100 can determine the instruction number and display the instruction only by referring to the current internal gaming state, and the sub control means 200 also receives the received internal gaming state and the instruction number. The instruction can be displayed only by referring to it.

  In addition to the effect group number or the condition device number after conversion and the instruction number, the condition device number may be transmitted to the sub control means 200. In this case, the condition device number is masked (for example, "0" is set) in the internal gaming state where the instruction display can occur, and the instruction display does not occur in the internal gaming state where the instruction display does not occur. In the case of the winning combination (for example, the above-mentioned re-playing combination-D1 to D3 and the like), the condition device number in the non-masked state may be transmitted.

  By the way, in the above explanation, it was decided to define whether or not the internal gaming state is capable of generating an instruction for each internal gaming state, but the instruction display is not defined for each internal gaming state. Alternatively, a push order flag may be provided as an index for determining whether or not the key can be generated. When the push order flag is on, it indicates that an instruction display can be generated (the push order flag is always on in the internal gaming states 2 to 3 and 6 to 7), and the push order flag is off. At one time, it indicates that an indication can not be generated. By providing such a push order flag, it is possible to provide when an instruction can be generated and when an instruction can not be generated even in the same internal gaming state. For example, even in the internal gaming state 0 (normal) in which no instruction is generated, it is possible to play a push sequence hit game described later (in the push sequence hit game, it is necessary to be able to generate an instruction, Only pressing the game to execute the pressing sequence game (turn on the pressing sequence flag). Also, in the above description, the internal gaming state 2 (AT preparation) and the internal gaming state 3 (AT) were managed as different internal gaming states, but these are combined into one internal gaming state and the current is AT game An AT flag may be provided as an index for determining whether or not there is an object. When the AT flag is on, it indicates AT game, while when the AT flag is off, it indicates that it is not AT game (AT is in preparation).

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the secondary control means 200 based on the effect group number (or the condition device number after conversion) transmitted as a control command and the condition device number of the special role (BB), It is determined that the start lever 32 has been operated (in fact, it is determined based on the special equipment condition device number, but it may be determined based on the effect group number), and the start lever 32 is operated It is configured to perform processing when. That is, in order to perform an instruction display by the image display device 41 in the processing at the time of operation of the start lever 32 by the sub control means 200, the effect group number and the condition device number of special role after the operation of the start lever 32 is performed. The instruction number must be sent before the is sent. Further, as described above, it is preferable that the instruction display by the image display device 41 is performed until the reels 21a to 21c reach constant speed rotation after the operation of the start lever 32 is performed. In addition, after the instruction display by the acquired number display 72 is performed by the main control means 100, it is preferable that the instruction number, the effect group number, and the condition device number of the special combination be transmitted. If the instruction display by the image display device 41 is not performed before the instruction display by the acquisition number display 72 is performed, even if an incorrect instruction number is sent, the acquisition number display 72 already displays the instruction number. Because the instruction display is performed, it is possible to notice that the instruction display by the image display device 41 is erroneous. Then, the instruction number, the effect group number, and the condition device number for the special part are displayed from the main control means 100 by the main control means 100, and then the instruction number, effect group number from the main control means 100. It is preferable that the special control condition device numbers be sent to the sub control means 200 by the time the reels 21a to 21c reach the constant speed rotation in the order of the condition device numbers. In order to reliably perform instruction display by the image display device 41 by the time the reels 21a to 21c reach constant speed rotation, conditions for the instruction number, effect group number, special role before starting the rotation of the reels 21a to 21c Preferably, the device number is set in a buffer for transmission as a control command.

  The main control unit 100 transmits the instruction number to the sub control unit 200, and then displays an instruction by the number-of-acquisitions display 72, and thereafter, the instruction display by the image display device 41 is performed. Good. Also, after the main control unit 100 transmits the instruction number to the sub control unit 200, the instruction display by the image display device 41 in which the player can easily grasp the correct pressing order is performed first, and then the instruction by the number-of-acquisitions display 72 You may comprise so that a display may be performed. By configuring in this manner, the player can immediately grasp the correct order and can proceed with the game smoothly. In addition, after the main control unit 100 transmits the instruction number to the sub control unit 200, the instruction display by the acquired number display 72 and the instruction display by the image display device 41 may be simultaneously performed.

  When the push order flag described above is provided, the push order flag also needs to be transmitted to the sub control means 200 before the effect group number and the special device condition apparatus number. This is because it is necessary to determine at this time whether the pressing order flag is on or off in order to perform instruction display by the image display device 41 in the process when the start lever 32 is operated.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the internal gaming state is configured to be transmitted to the sub control means 200 before the start lever 32 is operated (in the game start processing S551 described later). There is. By doing this, the sub control means 200 can grasp the internal gaming state of the next game (such as whether the internal gaming state shifts from the next game) before the start lever 32 is operated. It is possible to prepare for processing in the internal gaming state of the next game before the start lever 32 is operated.

  For example, when transitioning from the internal gaming state 1 (precursor) to the internal gaming state 2 (AT preparation), the decision screen is displayed on the image display device 41, but the sub control means 200 operates the start lever 32. Since it is known that the next game is to be shifted to the internal gaming state 2 (AT preparation) before being played, it is possible to prepare for displaying the finalized screen on the image display device 41, and the start lever After 32 is operated (based on the special equipment condition device number), the confirmation screen can be displayed promptly. In addition, when transitioning from internal gaming state 2 (AT preparation) to internal gaming state 3 (AT), the number of remaining games is displayed during internal gaming state 3 (AT), so the start lever 32 Prior to being operated, preparation can be made to display the number of remaining games on the image display device 41 (for example, information for displaying the number of remaining games is set in the video RAM of the image control board 400) After the start lever 32 is operated, the number of remaining games can be displayed promptly.

  When the AT flag described above is provided, the AT flag also needs to be transmitted from the main control unit 100 to the sub control unit 200 before the start lever 32 is operated.

(About the start condition of AT game)
As described above, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, basically, in the internal gaming state 2 (AT preparation), the gaming state after all the stop buttons 33a to 33c are stopped is the RT3 gaming state Is configured to shift to the internal gaming state 3 (AT). However, if the start condition of the internal gaming state 3 (AT) is made to be only the RT3 gaming state, in the internal gaming state 2 (AT preparation), the push order replay (replay role for shifting the gaming state) By ignoring push order navigation of -C1 to C6) and following the push order of push order bell, it does not shift to internal gaming state 3 (AT) but tries to prolong internal gaming state 2 (AT preparation) A player may come out. In particular, in the case of having a special part as in the present embodiment, there is a high possibility that a player who tries to wait for the special part to be elected may come out to prolong the internal gaming state 2 (AT preparation). Therefore, even if the gaming state is not the RT3 gaming state, the internal gaming state 2 (AT preparation) is forcibly made to shift to the internal gaming state 3 (AT) when not following the push order navigation. I can not extend my life. However, regardless of ignoring push order navigation, if it is configured to shift to the internal gaming state 3 (AT) in any case, even if the push order is accidentally mistaken. The problem is that the internal gaming state 3 (AT) starts in an adverse gaming state even if the player does not move to the internal gaming state 3 (AT) and does not have an unfair intention. There is also. Therefore, depending on the situation, either of the following can be adopted.

(1) Specification to shift to the internal gaming state 3 (AT) in any case when the instruction number does not follow the pushing order indicated by the instruction number In this specification, the player who accidentally made the pushing order wrong However, since the processing load by the main control means 100 can be reduced, the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment basically adopts this specification, as described above. Since there is no need to distinguish between the indication number by the pushing order bell and the indication number by the pushing order replay (replay role related to the transition of the gaming state), the pushing order operated by the player is the pushing order indicated by the present order number. Therefore, the processing load can be reduced (capacity reduction).

(2) Push Order Replay (Replay Role Associated with the Transition of the Game State) If the instruction number indicated at the time of winning does not follow the push order, a specification to make transition to the internal game state 3 (AT). To some extent, it is possible to rescue a player who has accidentally pushed in the wrong order. This is because it is considered that few players intentionally ignore the pushing order of pushing order bells, and ignoring the instruction number in case of pushing order bells is likely to have made an operation mistake. This is because the player can be rescued. However, in order to do this, the instruction number may be originally different between the push order bell and the push order replay (replay role related to the transition of the gaming state) (for example, “the left middle of the push order bell “Right” is the instruction number “A1”, “left middle right” of the replay in push sequence is the instruction number “B1”, and when the instruction number “B1” is selected, it matches the pressing order indicated by the instruction number To determine whether or not the player's operated pressing order matches the pressing order indicated by the current instruction number, and then the current is the winning of the re-playing combination (re-playing) Since it is necessary to determine whether or not the combination of the symbols of the symbol is displayed on the effective line, an increase in processing load (or an increase in storage capacity) by the main control means 100 occurs.

(3) Pushing order Replay (Replaying part related to the transition of the gaming state) If the gaming state falls without following the pushing order indicated by the instruction number at the time of winning, the specification to shift to the internal gaming state 3 (AT) According to this specification, it is possible to rescue a player who has mis-pushed in a highly contingent state. The reason is that the game state does not fall even if the push order of the push order replay (replay role related to the transition of the gaming state) is ignored, so that the push order replay (replay role related to the transition of the play state) This is because even if the order of pressing is misplaced, there is a possibility of being rescued. However, in order to do this, in addition to the above (2), it is also necessary to determine whether the gaming state has fallen, so an increase in processing load (increase in capacity) by the main control means 100 occurs. Do. In this embodiment, in order to adopt this specification, for example, it is necessary not to shift to the RT1 gaming state, even if the combination of symbols of the replay player combination 02 is stopped on the active line.

  In addition, it was decided to shift to the internal gaming state 3 (AT) when the gaming state was shifted to the RT3 gaming state, but with the combination of symbols to be shifted to the RT3 gaming state being elected to the replay role that can be displayed , And may transition to the internal gaming state 3 (AT). In addition, in the internal gaming state 2 (AT preparation), for the player who does not follow the pushing order navigation of pushing order replay (replay role-C1 to C6 for shifting the playing state), the pushing order is performed for a certain period. It may be configured to impose a penalty of not performing navigation.

(About the trigger of AT game addition (stock) lottery)
In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the trigger for the AT game addition (stock) lottery is configured to be performed by winning the condition device number which is won only in the specific gaming state. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8, the player wins in the RT3 gaming state and the RT4 gaming state (in other words, does not win in the non-RT gaming state, the RT1 gaming state, and the RT2 gaming state). The lottery is performed only when the combination-E) is won. In this way, if the player follows the pushing order navigation during AT game, the RT3 gaming state is maintained, and therefore it is possible to receive the AT game extra stock (stock) lottery, but the pushing order navigation by the player If you do not follow the game status may fall to the RT1 gaming state or RT2 gaming state, as a result, not winning the Replay Role-E which is the trigger for the addition, AT game of There is a possibility that there will be a period when it is not possible to receive the addition (stock) lottery. By doing this, the player who is not in compliance with the push order navigation may not be subjected to the AT game addition (stock) drawing only for a certain period without imposing a penalty (cooling the drawing). You will be able to Here, although the re-game is used as a trigger for the additional lottery, a specific small combination (for example, winning combination-C, D, E, F) may be used. Although the addition is used as a stock, it may be a benefit such as the number of AT game games.

(About the indication display by the effect)
As described above, the pressing order of the stop buttons 33a to 33c is assigned to the replaying role-D1 to D3, and the combination (replaying role) of symbols stopped and displayed on the activated line by the pressing order changes. It is configured to However, the main player 100 has no influence on the profit obtained by the player, except that the combination of symbols stopped and displayed on the activated line changes according to the pushing order. For example, the AT player stock has not been determined by winning the replay player combination D1 to D3, and whether or not to determine the AT stock is not changed by the combination of symbols stopped and displayed on the activated line. . In addition, since the combination of symbols of the replay role is stopped and displayed on the effective line in any pushing order, the profit obtained by the player is the same. It is determined by the main control means 100 whether or not to display an instruction (does not affect the withdrawal, display by the effect) in the game in which the condition device number having no influence on such withdrawal is won. It may be determined (in this case, the instruction number is also selected) or may be determined by the sub control unit 200 (in this case, the instruction number is also selected by the sub control unit 200). For example, in internal gaming state 3 (AT), when the condition device number is elected to the re-playing role-D2 of "10", the main control means 100, the effect group number "5" and the instruction number "A0" secondary control means Sent to 200. The sub control means 200 causes the replay player combination 05 to be stopped by displaying that the current internal gaming state is the internal gaming state 3 (AT) and the effect group number "5" (replay symbol V It is possible to determine whether the characters are arranged in a letter) or whether to display the reprint player combination 01 in a stopped state (replays are arranged in the middle), and an instruction can be displayed according to the determination (condition device number “10” There is no need to perform mask processing as described above because of the condition device number that does not affect the balls, and there is a one-to-one relationship with the effect group number, and the sub control means 200 receives an instruction number from the main control means 100. Even if “A0” is, it is possible to determine the pressing order for stopping and displaying the combination of symbols of the replay player combination 05 from the effect group number “5”). That is, since the instruction display can be changed by the sub control means 200, depending on the contents of the instruction display by the sub control means 200 (notification of the pressing order of the stop buttons 33a to 33c displayed on the image display device 41). Not a combination of symbols of replay player combination 05, but a combination of symbols of replay player combination 01 can be stopped and displayed on a predetermined line. As mentioned above, the AT game addition (stock) is drawn by the winning of the replay player-E, and when this replay player-E is won, the combination of symbols of the replay player 03 is on the effective line. The stop is displayed (may be replay player 04), and the symbol of "Replay" is aligned on the downward sloping line, so even when this replay player-D1 to D3 is elected, the combination of symbols of replay player 01 is selected. By displaying a stop on the activated line (in the middle, the symbols of Replay A or Replay B are aligned), it is possible to give the player the impression that the stock of AT is determined. In the case where the main control means 100 determines, since the instruction display by the number-of-acquisitions display 72 can also be performed, it is difficult for the player to understand whether or not the instruction display by effect is not exerted. However, the processing load of the main control unit 100 is increased.

  In addition, even when winning a replay role-D1 to D3, the main control means 100 may be configured to perform lottery of AT game addition (stock) regardless of the pressing order of the stop buttons 33a to 33c. . In this case, when the AT game is won, the sub control means 200 informs the pressing order that the combination of symbols of the replaying role 05 is stopped and displayed, and when the winning is not won, it is the pressing order. It can be configured not to notify. On the other hand, when the player wins the addition, the order of pushing may not be notified, and when the player does not win the addition, the combination of symbols of the replay player combination 05 may be notified of the pressing order being stopped. Alternatively, when the AT game is won and when it is not won, the probability of notifying the pressing order for stopping and displaying the combination of symbols of the replay player combination 05 is changed, and notification by lottery is not made. It may be configured as follows. Further, instead of the pressing order for stopping and displaying the combination of symbols of replay player combination 05, the pressing order in which the combination of symbols of replay player combination 01 is stopped and displayed may be notified (or not notified). In addition, even if AT game winning is not won, when there is stock of AT game, it announces the pushing order that the combination of symbols of replay player combination 05 (or replay player combination 01) is stopped and displayed (or notification Not) may be configured. With such a configuration, it is suggested that the result of the AT game extra lottery (or that there is a possibility that the AT game will be executed) with respect to the winning of the replay player-D1 to D3. Can be determined on the sub control board 200 side. In addition, although it is referred to as re-game D1 to D3, the combination may be a small combination in which the number of payouts is the same regardless of the push order and the combination of symbols stopped in the push order is different.

(About signal output to the outside through the external concentrated terminal board 80)
As described above, the external signal transmission unit 180 constituting the main control unit 100 is configured to output information regarding the current game to the outside through the external concentrated terminal board 80. The external concentrated terminal board 80 is configured to be able to output a plurality of signals. First, the condition for starting the internal gaming state 3 (AT) is satisfied (for example, as described above, when all the reels 21a to 21c are stopped, the gaming state is the RT3 gaming state, or the RT3 gaming state The first signal (for example, the BB signal) is turned on based on the push order navigation for shifting to the second position (for example, at the first hit of AT game, the second position). Signal (eg, RB signal) is also turned on. Further, when the termination condition of the internal gaming state 3 (AT) is satisfied, the first signal (BB signal) is turned off.

  Also, when the special part (BB1 to BB3) has won (when the start of the special game is determined), the second signal (RB signal) is turned on, and the special game ending condition is satisfied, the second Signal (RB signal) is turned off.

  In addition, even when the special signal (BB1 to BB3) is won when the first signal (BB signal) is on, the first signal (BB signal) is not turned off, and the special signal (BB1) is not output. The first signal (BB signal) is turned off and the second signal (RB signal) is turned on by winning of ~ BB3). This is because, if the first signal (BB signal) is turned off by the winning of the special part (BB1 to BB3), the first condition is not satisfied even though the termination condition of the internal gaming state 3 (AT) is not satisfied. When the signal (BB signal) is turned off, as a result, it is possible to notify that the special role (BB) has been won.

  It should be noted that the first signal (BB signal) is turned off even before the special part (BB1 to BB3) wins, after the final notification is given by the bonus lamp managed by the main control means 100. It is also good. However, when the bonus lamp is not provided, the first signal (BB signal) is obtained even after the special combination (BB1 to BB3) has won even after the final notice has been given by the image display device 41. Do not turn off). This is because the image display device 41 is managed by the sub control unit 200 and is different from the bonus lamp managed by the main control unit 100.

(About the process at the time of setting change)
In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, information on the AT game (internal gaming state etc.) is cleared when the setting is changed. Also, the information on the gaming state is not cleared if it is a specification that it is not desired to return to the non-RT gaming state, but it is cleared if it is a specification that can be returned. If a large number of games are required before returning from the non-RT gaming state to the RT1 gaming state, the player is forced to bear a burden, so it is preferable not to clear.

(Processing by main control means 100)
Next, processing executed by the main control means 100 will be described using FIGS. 16 to 40 together. Here, FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing the flow of program start processing, FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing the flow of setting change processing, FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing the flow of power recovery processing, and FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a flow of set 1 processing and control command set 2 processing, FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a flow of gaming progress main processing, FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing a flow of gaming medal management processing, and FIG. FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing the flow of the former stage of the game medal insertion check process, FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing the flow of the latter stage of the game medal insertion check process, and FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the flow, and FIG. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the flow of the lottery determination process, and FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the determination of the internal gaming state and the processing in the internal gaming states 0, 5 and 7 in the internal gaming state setting process. FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing the processing in the former stage of the internal gaming state 2 and the internal gaming state 3 of the internal gaming state setting processing, and FIG. 29 is the latter stage of the processing in the internal gaming state 3 of the internal gaming state setting processing. FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing the flow of reel rotation start pre-processing, FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing the flow of reel stop management processing, and FIG. 32 is a flow before the game end check processing FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing the flow of the previous stage of the game state transition process that constitutes the game end check process. FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing the flow of the game state transition process that constitutes the game end check process, and FIG. 35 shows the flow of the process in the internal game states 0 and 1 of the game end check process. FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing the flow of processing in the internal gaming state 2 of the game end check processing, and FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing the flow of processing in the internal game state 3 of the game end check processing. Yes, FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing the flow of processing in the internal gaming state 4 to 7 of the game end check processing, FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing the flow of interrupt processing and power off processing, FIG. 40 is control It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a command transmission process and a soft random number update process.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as a game control program to be executed by the main CPU 102 of the main control means 100, a program start process S500 executed when the power is turned on and a program executed subsequently to the program start process S500. The game progress main process S550 repeatedly executed for each unit game and the interrupt process S570 executed at a predetermined interrupt interval.

-Program start process S500-
When the power switch 35 of the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment is operated to turn on the power, the main CPU 102 of the main control unit 100 executes a program start process S500 shown in FIG. In the program start process S500, the main control unit 100 first initializes the register of the main CPU 102 (step S501), and the power-off process S5400 described later is normally executed in the power-off before the current power-on. Whether or not it is determined by the power-off process flag (step S502). If it is determined in step S502 that the power-off processing flag is a normal value, that is, the power-off processing S5400 is normally executed, the main control unit 100 calculates a checksum for the entire range of the RAM 104 (step S503, S504). If it is determined that the power-off process S5400 is not normally executed because the power-off flag is not the normal value (for example, not set) in step S502, the process of calculating the checksum is not executed. Set an abnormal value in the power-off process flag. By setting the abnormal value, it is considered that the power failure recovery data is abnormal. Then, the result of calculating the checksum is stored in the register as power failure recovery data (step S505). That is, information in which an abnormality is detected in any area of the RAM 104 or information which is normal in the entire range of the RAM 104 is stored as power failure recovery data.

  Next, the main control means 100 reads the data of the input port 1 and stores it in a register (step S506). This input port 1 is information of 1 byte (8 bits), and the door switch 91, the setting door switch 92, the setting change key switch 35 and the reset / setting switch 37 have predetermined information on opening / closing or on / off. It is configured to be set to a bit. That is, by reading the 1-byte information of the input port 1, it is possible to detect the opening / closing of the door or the on / off of the setting change key switch. The main control means 100 determines whether or not the designated switch (all of the door switch 91, the setting door switch 92 and the setting change key switch 36) of the information of the input port 1 is on (step S507). Then, if it is determined that all these switches are on, the main control means 100 determines whether the power failure recovery data stored in the register in step S505 is abnormal (step S508), and it is not abnormal. If it is determined that the flag is set, it is determined whether the setting change impossible flag is on (step S509). The setting change disabling flag is a flag for disabling the setting changing process, and in the slot machine 1 according to the present invention, the setting change disabling flag is displayed from the part drawing process S555 to the game end check S561 described later. Turns on. If the main control means 100 determines in step S507 that all of the designated switches are not on, and if it is determined in step S509 that the setting change impossible flag is not on, it determines whether or not the power failure recovery data is normal. If it is determined that it is normal (step S510), the power recovery processing S532 is executed. If it is determined that it is not normal, the state of the recovery impossible error continues (step S511). If it is determined in step S508 that the power failure recovery data is abnormal, or if it is determined in step S509 that the setting change impossible flag is on, the setting change processing S512 is executed.

-Setting change process S512-
When the process goes to setting change process S512, the main control means 100 stores a predetermined range in the register as an initialization range of the RAM 104 as shown in FIG. 17 (step S513). The predetermined range is a range when it is determined that the power-off process S5400 is normally executed, and the setting value data is not included (these values are not initialized). Further, main control means 100 determines whether or not the power failure recovery data described above is normal (step S514), and when it is determined not normal, stores the specific range in the register as the initialization range of RAM 104 (step 515). ). When it is determined that the power-off process S5400 is not normal, the setting value data is also a target of initialization. Then, the main control means 100 initializes the range set in step S513 or step S515 described above (steps S516 and S517).

  Next, the main control means 100 sets the start of interrupt processing such as the type of interrupt and the timer interrupt cycle (step S518), and stores data indicating “setting change start” in the register (step S519). ), To set the information of this register as a control command, the control command set 1 process S5000 is executed (step S520). As described later, the control command set in the control command set 1 process S5000 is transmitted to the sub control means 200 by the interrupt process S570 (the same applies to the following description).

  Further, main control means 100 determines whether or not the set value stored in RAM 104 is within the normal range (1 to 6) (step S521), and when it is determined that it is not normal, “1” is set as the set value. Are stored in the RAM 104 (step S522). Then, the main control means 100 turns on a lamp indicating that the setting change process is in progress (step S523), and updates the set value (step S525) when the operation of the reset / setting switch 37 is detected (step S524). Are repeated until the operation of the start lever 32 is detected (step S526). Here, the lamp in the setting change process can be configured, for example, by a 7-segment display so that the current setting value can be displayed. The main control means 100 detects the operation of the start lever 32, and detects that the setting change key switch 36 is turned off (step S527), and sets information of a storage area such as the RAM 104 (step S528). Then, the lamp in the setting change process is turned off (step S529), and data indicating "setting change end" is stored in the register (step S530). The processing S5000 is executed (step S531), and the game progression main processing S550 is executed.

-Power supply recovery process S532-
When the process returns to the power supply recovery process S532, the main control means 100 determines whether the set value stored in the RAM 104 is within the normal range (1 to 6) as shown in FIG. 18 (step S533). If it is determined that the initialization range is normal, the initialization range of the unused area of the RAM 104 is stored in the register (step S534), and the initialization range is initialized (steps S535 and S536). Next, the main control means 100 reads the data of the input ports 0 to 2 (step S537) in order to update from the input data before power-off to the latest data (step S537). Etc. (step S538), and clear the data indicating the "power-off process flag" from the RAM 104 (step S539), and return to the execution position of the program interrupted when the power is shut off. Do. When the main control means 100 determines that the set value is not normal at step S533, the state of the non-returnable error continues (step S540). The input port 0 is 1 byte (8 bits) of information, and each bit has a check button 34, a 1 bet button 31a, a MAX bet button 31b, a start lever 32, a left stop button 33a, and a middle stop button 33b. And 1 is set when the right stop button 33c is turned on. Further, the input port 2 is also 1 byte (8 bits) of information, and when the power supply is detected in each bit, when the first insertion sensor 61 and the second insertion sensor 62 detect a game medal, the payout sensor When the game medal is detected at 71 and when the hopper device is full, 1 is set.

-Control command set 1 process S5000
Control command set 2 processing S5010-
The control command set 1 process S5000 is a process for calling the control command set 2 process S5010 and storing the information stored in the register in the control command buffer as a control command. The control command set in this process is transmitted to the sub control unit 200 in a control command transmission process S5290 described later. Here, the control command in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment is composed of 2-byte data, the upper 1 byte is called "first control command", and the lower 1 byte is called "second control command". Further, a control command buffer for storing control commands to be sent to the sub control means 200 is provided in the RAM 104 and is configured to buffer 32 control commands (data size is 64 bytes).

  When the control command set 1 process S5000 is called, as shown in FIG. 19, the main control means 100 first prohibits the execution of the interrupt process (step S5001) and executes the control command set 2 process S5010 (step S5001). S5002).

  When the control command set 2 process S5010 is called, the main control means 100 sets the address of the write pointer in the register (step S5011), and sets the data (value of the write pointer) of this address in the register ( Step S5012). Here, the write pointer holds the position where the next control command can be written in the control command buffer, and when one control command is written in the control command buffer, 1 is added to the value of the write pointer. . Since the control command buffer is used cyclically, when the control command is written to the last area of the control command buffer, the write pointer is configured to store the position of the first area of the control command buffer. It is done. Similarly, a read pointer, which will be described later, is a control command stored in the control command buffer, and holds the first stored position among control commands not yet transmitted. Then, the start address of the control command buffer is set in the register (step S5013), and the value obtained by doubling the value of the write pointer set in the register is added to the value of the start address of this register. Is determined (hereinafter, referred to as "designated address") (step S5014).

  Next, the main control means 100 reads the data stored at the position of the designated address stored in the register, and determines whether this data is not "0". That is, when the data of this designated address is not "0", since 32 commands are buffered in the control command buffer, the main control means 100 stores "0" as data of the designated address. It is determined whether or not the number of control commands stored in the control command buffer is smaller than 32 (step S5015). If it is determined in step S5015 that the number of control commands buffered in the control command buffer is smaller than 32, the main control unit 100 needs to refer to the data stored in the RAM 104 for the data to be written in the control command buffer. It is determined whether the data is a certain data (step S5016), and when referring to the data stored in the RAM 104, the data to be written as the second control command is read from the RAM 104 and stored in a register (step S5017). Here, "data that needs to be referred to data" includes prescribed number information (automatic insertion number at the time of re-play), setting value information, information of gaming state, information of internal gaming state, and the like. Then, the data stored in the register in the process immediately before the control command set 1 process S5000 is executed is stored in the position of the designated address of the RAM 104 as data indicating the first control command (step S5018). 1 is added to the specified address, and the data indicating the second control command stored in the register is stored at the next address of the RAM 104 storing the first control command (step S5019), and 1 is added (step S5020), and the process returns to the control command set 1 process. Then, the main control means 100 permits the interrupt (step S5003), terminates the control command set 1 process S5000, and returns to the process in which the control command set 1 process S5000 is called.

-Game progress main processing S550-
In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the program start process S500, the setting change process S512, and the power recovery process S532 described above are performed after the power is turned on, a game progress main process S550 for controlling the progress of the game is executed. . Here, the game progress main processing S550 will be described along with the progress of one game.

  When the process proceeds to the game progress main process S550, the main control means 100 first executes the game start process as shown in FIG. 20 (step S551). In this game start process S 551, the instruction number in the previous game is cleared, and the combination of symbols stopped and displayed on the activated line in the previous game re-plays the current game or a special game (BB game) When it is determined that is, the operation flag corresponding to each game is set. In addition, when the predetermined effect executed by the sub control unit 200 is ended in the previous game, the wait for the predetermined time (standby for the sub control unit 200 to execute the effect relating to the end of the predetermined effect Process). Further, control commands indicating various game information (set value, gaming state, internal gaming state) are written in the control command buffer (specifically, it is executed by the above-described control command set 1 process S5000). In addition, when the current game is a re-game, a process of automatically inserting a game medal betted in the previous game is performed. Further, the blocker 60 of the selector is turned on to form a medal flow path. However, when the current game is a replay and the credit number is maximum (50 sheets), the blocker 60 is not turned on.

  Next, the main control means 100 determines that the number of gaming medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 51 or betted by operating the bet button 31 matches the prescribed number (the gaming medal limit flag is on), and The game medal management process S5030 is repeatedly executed until the start lever 32 is turned on (steps S552 and S553). The game medal limit flag is cleared in the game start process S551. If it is determined in step S553 that the game medal limit flag is on and the start lever 32 is on, the start lever reception flag is turned off. Further, when the start lever reception flag is turned on, it is informed by a predetermined lamp that the start lever 32 can be operated. Then, when the main control means 100 determines that the number of game medals betted in step S553 matches the specified number and the start lever 32 is turned on, the blocker 60 of the selector is turned off (step S554). The lottery process S5080 is executed to determine a winning combination (step S555), and then a process based on the winning combination and the internal gaming state is executed by the internal gaming state setting process S5120 (step S556). When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the reel rotation start pre-processing step S5170 is executed (step S557), and then the main game is executed by the reel stop management processing (step S558), and all the reels 21a to 21c are stopped. Then, it is determined whether or not the combination of symbols corresponding to any of the symbols has stopped based on the combination of symbols displayed stopped on the effective line (step S559), and when winning combination is won The game medal of the number allocated to the winning combination of the combination of the symbols displayed being stopped is paid out (step S560), the game end check process S5220 is executed (step S561), and one game is ended. Then, the process returns to step S551.

-Game medal management process S5030-
The game medal management process S5030 is for managing the bet of the game medal at the start of the game in the above-described game progress main process S550. When the game medal management process S5030 is executed, the main control means 100 determines whether or not the blocker 60 is on as shown in FIG. 21 (step S5031). When the blocker 60 is on, further, It is determined whether the first insertion sensor 61 or the second insertion sensor 62 is on (step S5032), and when any one of the insertion sensors is on, the game medal insertion check process S5038 is executed. In FIG. 21 to FIG. 23, the first closing sensor 61 is referred to as “closing sensor 1”, and the second closing sensor 62 is referred to as “closing sensor 2”. When it is determined in step S5031 that the blocker 60 is not on, and when it is determined in step S5032 that neither of the two insertion sensors 61 and 62 is on, the main control means 100 determines the bet button 31 and clearing. It is determined whether or not the operation of button 34 is acceptable (step S5033), and further, when the operation of these buttons is acceptable, whether or not the operation acceptance of bet button 31 or settlement button 34 has been detected It is determined whether or not (step S5034). Then, when the operation acceptance is detected in step S5034, when the operation acceptance is an operation on the clearing button 34, the game medal clearing process is executed (step S5036), and when the operation on the clearing button 34 is not operated, the bet button 31 The game medal storage processing is executed (step S5037), the game medal management processing S5030 is ended, and the process returns to the game progress main S550. When it is determined in step S5033 that the operation acceptance of the bet button 31 and the settlement button 34 is not possible, and when it is determined that the operation acceptance of the bet button 31 or the settlement button 34 is not detected in step S5034, The game medal management process S5030 ends.

  On the other hand, when it is detected in step S5032 that the first insertion sensor 61 or the second insertion sensor 62 is turned on, the main control means 100 executes a game medal insertion check process S5038 shown in FIG. The main control means 100 clears the start lever acceptance permission flag (step S5039), and determines whether the first closing sensor 61 is on (step S5040). When the first insertion sensor 61 is not on, it means that the second insertion sensor 62 on the downstream side has detected the game medal first, so the main control means 100, as shown in FIG. Data indicative of an "illegal token passing error" is stored in a register (step S5074), error display processing is executed based on the contents of this register (step S5076), and the game medal insertion check processing S5038 is ended.

  Referring back to FIG. 22, when determining that the first closing sensor 61 is on in step S5040, the main control unit 100 sets the closing time of the closing sensor 1 passage check (step S5041), the first closing sensor 61 and the second closing. It is determined whether the sensor 62 is on (step S5042). If it is determined in step S5042 that the first and second closing sensors 61 and 62 are not on, the main control unit 100 determines whether the first closing sensor 61 is on (step S5043). If it is determined in step S5043 that the first insertion sensor 61 is not on, it is considered that the game medal is flowing backward, so as shown in FIG. It stores (step S5074), executes error display processing based on the contents of this register (step S5076), and ends the game medal insertion check processing S5038. When the main control unit 100 determines that the first loading sensor 61 is on in step S5043, it determines whether the loading sensor 1 passage check time has elapsed (step S5044). If it is determined that there is not, the process returns to step S5042 to repeat the above-described processing. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S5044 that the insertion sensor 1 check time has elapsed, the main control means 100 is staying in the state where the game medal is detected by the first insertion sensor 61 (clogging in the flow path (Step S5075), and executes error display processing based on the contents of this register (step S5076). The game medal insertion check process S5038 ends.

  Referring back to FIG. 22, when it is determined in step S5042 that the first and second closing sensors 61 and 62 are on, the main control unit 100 sets the closing time of the closing sensor 2 (step S5045), and the first closing sensor It is determined whether 61 is off and the second input sensor 62 is on (step S5046). If the main control means 100 determines that the first closing sensor 61 is off and the second closing sensor 62 is not on, then whether or not the first and second closing sensors 61 and 62 are on is determined If it is determined (step S5047) that these sensors 61 and 62 are not turned on, data indicating "gaming medal illegal passage error" is stored in the register as shown in FIG. 23 (step S5074). An error display process is executed based on the contents (step S5076), and the game medal insertion check process S5038 is ended. Also, if the main control means 100 determines in step S5047 that the first and second insertion sensors 61 and 62 are on, does the insertion sensor 1 passage check time or the insertion sensor 2 passage check time have elapsed? It is determined whether or not it is determined (step S5048), and when it is determined that any passage check time has not elapsed, the process returns to step S5046 and the above-described processing is repeated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S5048 that the insertion sensor 1 check time or the insertion sensor 2 check time has elapsed, the main control unit 100 is in a state in which the game medals are detected by the first and second insertion sensors 61 and 62. It is determined that the game is stagnating (clogged in the flow path), and as shown in FIG. 23, data indicating “gaming medal stagnation error” is stored in the register (step S5075), and based on the contents of this register The error display process is executed (step S5076), and the game medal insertion check process S5038 is ended.

  If it is determined in step S5046 that the first closing sensor 61 is off and the second closing sensor 62 is on, the main control means 100 turns off the first and second closing sensors 61 and 62 as shown in FIG. If it is determined that the first and second insertion sensors 61 and 62 are not off, it is determined whether the second insertion sensor 62 is on (step S5050), If the second insertion sensor 62 is not on, data indicating "gaming medal illegal passage error" is stored in a register (step S5074), and error display processing is executed based on the contents of this register (step S5076). The medal input check process S5038 is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S5050 that the second loading sensor 62 is on, the main control means 100 determines whether the loading sensor 2 passage check time has elapsed (step S5051), and has elapsed. If it is determined that there is not, the process returns to step S5049 to repeat the above-described processing. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S5051 that the insertion sensor 2 check time has elapsed, the main control means 100 is staying in the state where the game medal is detected by the second insertion sensor 62 (clogging in the flow path (Step S5075), and executes error display processing based on the contents of this register (step S5076). Game medal insertion check processing S5038 Finish.

  Next, when the main control means 100 determines that the first and second insertion sensors 61 and 62 are off in step S5049, the main control means 100 acquires the stipulated number of the current game, and the re-game activation flag in the current game Is checked (whether replay is in operation) (step S5052), and the number of stored game medals (the number of credits) is read (step S5053). The next game medal can also be inserted depending on whether the total value of the number of game medals bet at the current time and the number of game medals stored is less than the number obtained by adding the maximum number of storages to the specified number. (Step S5054). If the insertion is not possible, the blocker 60 is turned off (step S5055). With the blocker 60 turned off, the game medals inserted thereafter are returned to the return slot.

  Further, the main control means 100 stores data indicating "one sheet input" in the register (step S5056), and executes control command set 1 processing S5000 to set the information of this register as the control command (step S5057). ). Then, the main control means 100 determines whether or not the game medal limit flag is on (step S5058), and when the game medal limit flag is on, the one stored card number addition process S5059 is executed, and it is off. When it is, one game medal addition processing S5063 is executed. The game medal limit flag is set in one game medal addition process S5063 described later.

  The one stored card number addition process S5059 is a process for adding the game medals whose insertion is detected by the above process to the game medium storage means 141 as a credit, and the main control means 100 as shown in FIG. The number of stored game medals is read from the RAM 104 (step S5060), 1 is added to the stored number for update (step S5061), and the updated stored number is stored in the RAM 104 (step S5062). As shown in 23, the start lever acceptance permission flag is turned on (step S5077), and the game medal insertion check process S5038 is ended.

  One game medal addition process S5063 is a process for adding the game medals for which insertion has been detected by the above process to the number of game medals to be betted, and the main control means 100 as shown in FIG. The number of game medals betted is read from the RAM 104 (step S5064), 1 is added to the number of game medals for update (step S5065), and the updated number of game medals is stored in the RAM 104 (step S5066) . Next, the main control means 100 clears the information on the number of game medals acquired by winning in the previous game (step S5067), and displays the inserted number by setting the number of betted game medals in the output port. The LED is turned on (step S5068). Further, the main control means 100 confirms the specified number of games currently played (step S5069), and reads the number of gaming medals currently bet from the RAM 104 (step S5070), and the number of gaming medals betted It is determined whether or not the number of game medals that can be bet has reached the limit by determining whether the number matches the specified number (step S5071), and when the limit is reached, the game medal limit flag is set (Step S5072), the start lever acceptance permission flag is turned on (step S5073), the process returns to FIG. 23, and the game medal insertion check process S5038 is ended. If it is determined in step S5071 that the limit has not been reached, step S5072 and step S5073 are not executed.

-Role lottery process S5080-
The role lottery process S5080 is a process of determining a winning combination in the above-described game progress main process S550. As shown in FIG. 25, in the lottery process S5080, the main control means 100 acquires a random number value (2-byte random number) from the random number value register of the random number generator 103 which is the first random number generation means It is set as a numerical value (step S5081), and the soft random number (2 bytes) is read from the second random number generation means 190 and set as a second random number value (step S5082). Then, a third random number value is generated from the first random number value and the second random number value by calculation (for example, by addition processing), and is set as a random number value for combination lottery (step S5083). The register is set (step S 5084). Thus, the third random number is calculated by the first random number value acquired from the random number generator 103 which is the first random number generation means, and the second random number value which is the soft random number acquired from the second random number generation means 190. By generating a random number value and using it for the role lottery, the randomness of the random number used in the role lottery can be enhanced, and the winning combination can be made to have no regularity.

  The main control means 100 performs lottery of a winning combination using the random number value for winning combination generated in this manner, but at this time, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the replay role, winning combination, special role Draw lots in the order of However, the lottery for the replay role is not executed in the RT5 gaming state (special gaming state, that is, RT5-12 gaming state or RT5-3 gaming state). In addition, the drawing of the special part is not executed in the RT4 gaming state (inside playing state) and the RT5 gaming state (special gaming state, that is, RT5-12 gaming state or RT5-3 gaming state).

  First, the main control means 100 determines whether or not the condition device for the special role is operating (whether or not the condition device flag for the special role indicating that the special role in the combination determination information storage area is won is set). ) To determine whether it is a non-internal game state or internal game state (step S5085), and then whether or not a special game is in operation (special game in the game state information storage area) It is determined whether or not the RT5 gaming state (RT5-12 gaming state or RT5-3 gaming state) is determined by determining whether the special game operation flag indicating that the game is in progress is set or not (step S5086) If not RT5 gaming state (RT5-12 gaming state or RT5-3 gaming state), the non-RT gaming state, RT1 gaming state, RT2 gaming state, RT3 gaming state and RT4 gaming state Set the condition device internal lottery address table replay combination depending on the whether the gaming state Les (step S5087), executes the lottery determination process S5100 (step S5088). Here, with the condition device internal lottery address table, the condition device number (winning number) shown in FIG. 8 is used as a search key (hereinafter referred to as a search number), and for the search number, the player corresponding to the search number It is a table in which probability data (numbers shown in FIG. 8) is set for each type of winning combination (replay combination, winning combination, special combination). Combinations of search numbers and probability data are stored side by side in the order of determination of winning in lottery determination processing S5100 described later. In the following description, although all winning combinations are listed as a combination of a search number and probability data, when the search numbers are continuous and the same probability data is repeated, The search number, the probability data, and the number of repetitions may be stored. For example, in the case of the configuration shown in FIG. 8, since the winning combination-A1 to A6 having a search number (winning number) of 18 to 23 in the non-RT gaming state is 1670 in number (probability data), It can be configured such that “18”, “probability data = 1670”, and “the number of repetitions = 4”, and 1 is added to the search number each time it is repeated. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the amount of memory used for the condition device internal lottery address table.

  As shown in FIG. 26, in the lottery determination process S5100, the main control means 100 determines whether or not it is a lottery determination of a replay role or a winning combination (step S5101), and a lottery determination of a replay role or a winning combination If it is, the first search number of the condition device internal lottery address table is set (step S5102). For example, when it is a lottery determination of a replay player and the probability data of the replay player is set in the order shown in FIG. 8, “1” is set as the search number. Next, it is determined whether there is probability data for each setting value (step S5103). If there is no probability data for each setting value, probability data common to the setting values is acquired based on the currently set search number (Step S5104) If there is probability data for each installation value, acquire the setting value (step S5105), and acquire probability data for each setting value based on this setting value and the currently set search number. (Step S5106). Also, it reads the random number value (third random number value) for combination lottery set in step S 5084 of the combination lottery process S 5080 (step S 5107), and subtracts the probability data of the current search number from the random number value for combination lottery S5108) The random number value for the combination lottery from which the probability data has been subtracted is stored (step S5109). Then, the main control means 100 determines whether or not the current random number for combination lottery is smaller than 0 (step S5110), and adds 1 to the search number when the random number for combination random lottery is 0 or more (step S5111). ), It is determined whether the search has been completed for all the search numbers (step S5112), and if the determination of yes or no has not been completed, the process returns to step S5107 and the above process is repeated.

  From the above, when it is determined in step S5110 that the role lottery random number is smaller than 0, it is determined that the combination of the search number at that time is won, and in step S5112, the probability of all search numbers in the condition device internal lottery address table Even if the data is subtracted, if the random number for winning combination is 0 or more, the search number is cleared (searching number = 0) (step S5113), and the winning combination included in the current condition device internal lottery address table is won It can be judged that it is not. In the case of FIG. 8, in the non-RT gaming state, when the random number value for the combination lottery (third random number value) at the time when the lottery determination means S5100 is called is 9200, the search number (winning number) is “ Even if the probability data (number of decimal places, 8962 in FIG. 8) of 1's re-player role-A is not smaller than 0 even if it is subtracted from the random number for this role lottery, it is won for re-player role-A It is not judged. Also, if the role random number (third random number) is 50, the probability data (8962) of the replay role A, whose search number (win number) is “1”, is subtracted from the role random number Since it becomes smaller than 0, it can be determined that the player has won this re-play role-A.

  Referring back to FIG. 25, as a result of the lottery determination processing in step S5088, it is determined whether or not the player has won the remake (step S5089), and when it is determined that the player has won, the current search number is used as the condition device number buffer. (Step S5097), and this part lottery process S5080 is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S5089 that the player has not won the replay role, next, according to the current gaming state (non-RT gaming state, RT1 gaming state, RT2 gaming state, RT3 gaming state and RT4 gaming state) The condition device internal lottery address table of the winning combination is set (step S5090), and the lottery determination process S5100 is executed (step S5091). In the above example, when the random number value for combination lottery (third random number value) generated in step S 5083 is 9200, the random number value for combination lottery is 238 when the lottery determination process for the replay role is executed. (Because the total value of all probability data of replay player is 8962). Therefore, since the probability data of a winning combination-A1 having a search number (winning number) of "18" in the non-RT gaming state is 1670, it is determined that the winning combination-A1 is won. The main control means 100 determines whether or not the winning combination has been won from the result of the lottery determination in step S5091 (step S5092), and when it is determined that the winning combination is not made, the condition device of the special combination is activated. Whether it is RT4 gaming state (internal playing state) or not, RT5 gaming state (special gaming state, either RT5-12 gaming state or RT5-3 gaming state) in which special gaming is activated It judges whether or not there is (step S5093), when it is not RT4 gaming state and RT5 gaming state (RT5-12 gaming state or RT5-3 gaming state), it acquires the special equipment condition device search number (step S5094) Then, the condition device internal lottery address table for the special part is set (step S5095), and the lottery determination process S5100 is executed (step S5096). Also in this process, the search number is set when the special combination is won, and when the special combination is not selected (when neither the re-playing combination, the winning combination nor the special combination is won, it becomes a loss) The search number is set to 0). Finally, the current condition device search number is stored in the condition device number buffer (step S5097), and the combination lottery process S5080 is ended.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 8, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the condition device numbers of the replay role and the winning combination are independent of the condition device numbers of the special role. Therefore, when the special character combination is won, the condition device number of the special character combination is set to the character combination selection number, and when the special combination is not selected, the value of the character combination selection number becomes "0" (for example, When BB1 is won, it is "1". When BB2 is won, it is "2". When BB3 is won, it is "3".

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the probability data (winning determination data) is subtracted in a predetermined order from the third random number value (random number value for the role lottery) generated for the role lottery. It is configured to determine that the player has won the winning combination for the probability data when it becomes smaller than 0. According to this configuration, probability data is associated with each winning combination (target to be determined) that is desired to be determined and stored as a condition device internal lottery address table (winning determination data group), and this probability data is calculated from the third random value. Since determination can be made only by performing subtraction processing in order, determination processing of a lottery can be realized easily. Of course, the above probability data is sequentially added to the third random number value (random number value for combination lottery), and it is determined that the player is elected when the maximum value (65535 in the case of 2-byte data) is exceeded. Is also possible. However, in the case of determination by addition, for example, when performing a random number range of 0 to 999, a probability value is further added after adding a predetermined value (for example, 64537 for 2 byte data) to the third random number. And the processing becomes complicated. On the other hand, if it is the subtraction method mentioned above, it can be determined by sequentially subtracting probability data from random numbers for drawing, regardless of the range of random numbers.

  In the above description, although the case where the condition device internal lottery address table is set for each type of winning combination has been described, for example, in accordance with the order of lottery, it is collectively organized in the order of re-playing winning combination, winning combination and special winning combination A table may be defined and a range used for the determination may be designated when making a winning determination. For example, there are 5 replay players, the search numbers are 1 to 5, the winning combinations are 5 and the search numbers are 6 to 10, the special role is 1 and the search numbers are 11 Suppose that they are defined in order. In this case, when the determination is made in the non-RT gaming state in the order of the re-game combination, the winning combination, and the special combination, re-designation is performed by designating as "determine using search data from 1 to 11 probability data". It is possible to determine the winning combination of the combination, the winning combination and the special combination. On the other hand, in the RT4 gaming state (inside playing state), since the winning combination of the special part is not determined, designating as "determining by using the probability data of 1 to 10 search numbers" It is possible to determine the winning combination. Therefore, when the condition device internal lottery address table is stored with such a data structure, the process of winning determination can be realized more easily.

-Internal gaming state setting process S5120-
The internal gaming state setting processing S5120 is for executing processing for each internal gaming state when the start lever 32 is operated. In the processing for each internal gaming state, determination of an instruction number for AT lottery, pushing order bell, and pushing order replay is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 27, when the main control means 100 executes the internal gaming state setting process S5120, first, whether or not the current internal gaming state is one of "1", "4" and "6". If it is determined (step S5121) that the internal gaming state is in effect, the internal gaming state setting process S5120 is ended. On the other hand, when the internal gaming state is not "1", "4" or "6", the main control means 100 determines whether or not the current internal gaming state is "0" (step S5122). If it is determined that the gaming state is "0", it is determined whether or not the combination determined by the winning combination determination means 110 is a rare combination (step S5123), and if it is not a rare combination, the internal gaming state setting is made. The process S5120 ends. Further, when the main control means 100 determines that the player has won the prize in the step S5123, it performs an AT lottery (step S5124), and determines whether or not the AT lottery has been won (step S5125). If it is determined that the lottery has not been won, the internal gaming state setting process S5120 is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S5125 that the AT lottery is won, the main control means 100 adds 1 to the AT stock counter CS (step S5126), and determines the leading game number by lottery (step S5127). The game state setting process S5120 is ended.

  If it is determined in step S5122 that the internal gaming state is not "0", the main control means 100 determines whether the current internal gaming state is "2" or "3" (step S5128) . Then, when determining that the current internal gaming state is "2" or "3", the main control means 100 determines the winning combination (condition device number) determined by the winning combination determination means 110 as shown in FIG. Determine the instruction number according to. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13, when it is determined that “left middle right” is the winning combination with the correct pressing order (condition device numbers are 3 and 13) (step S5129), “A1” is set (step S5130). If it is determined that "right and left middle" is the winning combination in the correct pressing order (condition device numbers are 4 and 14) (step S5131), "A2" is set as the instruction number (step S5132). If it is determined that "middle right and left" is the winning combination with the correct pressing order (condition device numbers are 5 and 15) (step S5133), "A3" is set as the instruction number (step S5134). If it is determined that "middle right left" is the winning combination in the correct pressing order (condition device numbers are 6 and 16) (step S5135), "A4" is set as the instruction number (step S5136). If it is determined that "right and left middle" is the winning combination in the correct pressing order (condition device numbers are 7 and 17) (step S5137), an instruction number "A5" is set (step S5138). If it is determined that "right middle left" is the winning combination with the correct pressing order (condition device numbers are 8 and 17) (step S5139), an instruction number "A6" is set (step S5140). In addition, as shown in FIG. 29, when it is determined that "left **" is the winning combination in the order of correct answer (condition device numbers are 18, 19, 24, 25) (step S5141), the instruction number "A7" is set (step S5142). Further, when it is determined that "Middle **" is the winning combination of the correct pressing order (condition device numbers are 20, 21, 26, 27) (step S5143), the instruction number "A8" is set ( Step S5144). Further, when it is determined that "right **" is the winning combination in the correct order (condition device number is 22, 23, 28, 29) (step S5145), an instruction number "A9" is set (step S5145) Step S5146). In the case of other winning combinations, no instruction number is set. Further, when “A1” to “A9” are not set as the instruction numbers in the above process, “A0” is obtained.

  As described above, depending on the winning combination (for example, re-play combination-F5 shown in FIG. 13), there are two correct pressing orders, so although not shown in FIG. 28, before determining the instruction number, It is selected which pressing order is the correct pressing order (the selection method is as described above).

  When the instruction number is determined by the above processing, the main control means 100 determines whether or not the internal gaming state is "3" (step S5147), and the internal gaming state is not "3" (ie, the internal gaming state Is determined to be "2", the internal gaming state setting process S5120 is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5147 that the internal gaming state is "3", the main control means 100 plays the winning combination only when the winning combination is the RT3 gaming state (specifically, as described above, the condition device It is determined whether or not the number is 12 Replay Role-E) (Step S5148), and if it is not this role, the internal gaming state setting processing S5120 is ended, and if it is this role, the AT lottery is performed ( Step S5149) It is determined whether or not the AT lottery has been won (step S5150). If the AT lottery has not been won, the internal gaming state setting process S5120 is ended. If it is determined in step S5150 that the AT lottery has been won, 1 is added to the AT stock counter CS (step S5151), and the internal gaming state setting process S5120 is ended.

  Referring back to FIG. 27, when it is determined in step S5128 that the current internal gaming state is not "2" or "3", the current internal gaming state is "5" or "7", so the main control means 100 , AT lottery is performed (step S5152), it is determined whether or not AT lottery is won (step S5153), when AT lottery is won, 1 is added to AT stock counter CS (step S5154), the internal gaming state The setting process S5120 ends. In the AT lottery in step S5152, when the internal gaming state is "7", the winning probability in the AT lottery is configured to be higher than when the internal gaming state is "5".

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the AT lottery is performed when the player is won the rare role in the internal gaming state 0, and in the internal gaming state 3 the player is elected only in the RT3 gaming state The AT lottery is performed when the player wins the game (for example, replay player-E), and in the internal gaming state 7, the each game AT lottery is performed regardless of the winning combination. In the internal gaming states 2 and 3, an instruction number (A1 to A9) is set to the winning combination assigned the pressing order.

-Reel rotation start pre-processing S5170-
The reel rotation start pre-processing step S5170 includes the instruction number determined in the above-described internal gaming state setting processing step S5120, the effect group number in which the condition device number of the winning combination is masked, and the winning combination winning number when winning the special combination. This processing is to transmit to the sub control means 200.

  As shown in FIG. 30, when the main control unit 100 executes the reel rotation start pre-processing S5170, it corresponds to the numbers shown in FIG. 13B (corresponding to the instruction numbers according to the instruction numbers determined in the internal gaming state setting processing S5120. The acquired number 1 to 9 is displayed on the acquired number display 72 (step S5171). Specifically, based on FIG. 13B, the number corresponding to the instruction number is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 104 (or may be a predetermined register of the main CPU 102). When the number corresponding to the instruction number is stored in the predetermined area (or register), the stored number is output to the number-of-acquisitions indicator 72 by an interrupt process S570 described later. Further, main control means 100 stores the instruction number in a register (step S5172), and executes control command set 1 processing S5000 in order to set the information of this register as a control command (step S5173). Further, as described above, mask processing is performed on the condition device number using the table shown in FIG. 14 to determine the effect group number (step S5174), and the effect group number is stored in the register (step S5175) The control command set 1 process S5000 is executed to set the information of this register as a control command (step S5176). Furthermore, the bonus item winning number is stored in the register (step S5177), and control command set 1 process S5000 is executed to set the information of this register as the control command (step S5178). As described in the interrupt process S570 described later, the display of the information corresponding to the instruction number on the acquired sheet number display 72 (7-segment display control process S575) is performed to the sub control means 200 by the control command of the instruction number. Since the transmission (control command transmission processing S580) is performed prior to the transmission, the display of the instruction number by the main control unit 100 is performed prior to the display by the sub control unit 200. Further, main control means 100 stores information on AT in a register (step S5179), executes control command set 1 processing S5000 to set the information of this register as a control command (step S5180), and starts reel rotation. The preprocessing S5170 is ended. Here, "information about AT" means the internal gaming state as described above (for example, if internal gaming state 2 is in preparation for AT, and internal gaming state 3 is in AT gaming), the number of prediction games And the number of remaining games, the number of AT games and the number of remaining games, the result of stock lottery of AT, the number of stock, the result of lottery of AT number of games, the number of additional games included, etc. On the other hand, storage in a register and control command set 1 processing are executed. The information transmitted as a control command in FIG. 30 is an example.

-Reel stop management processing S5190-
When the reel rotation start pre-processing S5170 is completed, as shown in FIG. 31, the main control unit 100 monitors whether the minimum game time has elapsed from the start of the previous game (rotation start of the reels 21a to 21c) ( Step S5193) When the minimum game time has passed, data indicating “reel rotation start standby” is set in the register in order to give the secondary control means 200 a state that the reel is in the rotation start standby state ( Step S5194) The control command set 1 process S5000 is executed to set the information of this register as a control command (step S5195), and the information for rotating the reels 21a to 21c at a constant speed (80 rpm / min) is the RAM 104. (Step S5196). The control of the rotation and stop of the reels 21a to 21c (reel drive control) is executed in an interrupt process S570 described later.

  Further, main control means 100 determines whether or not the reel is rotating at a constant speed (step S5197), and when in constant speed, determines whether the defect detection counter value is an abnormal value (step S5198). When the value is an abnormal value, for example, there is a possibility that the stepping motor for rotating the reels 21a to 21c may be out of step, etc., so the information for making the reels 21a to 21c rotate at constant speed is stored again in the RAM 104 Step S5199. Furthermore, the main control means 100 determines whether or not confirmation of whether or not the reel is rotating at a constant speed has been completed for all of the reels 21a to 21c, and returns to step S5197 until the confirmation is completed. The process is repeated (step S5200).

  When the above processing is completed, the reels 21a to 21c are rotating at a constant speed, so the main control unit 100 next generates the stop position data (stoppable position) described in the reel control unit 120. It is judged whether or not it has been completed (step S5201), and if it has not been created, stop position data (stoppable position) is created (step S5202). Further, main control means 100 determines whether or not the operation of stop buttons 33a to 33c is received (step S5203), and when reception of stop buttons 33a to 33c is detected, the stop position is determined based on the stop position data described above. It determines (step S5204), sets data indicating "reel to be stopped and the number of sliding symbols" in a register (step S5205), and executes control command set 1 processing S5000 in order to set information of this register as a control command. (Step S5206). Then, the main control means 100 determines whether or not all the reels 21a to 21c have stopped (step S5207), and if it has not stopped, the process returns to step S5197 and repeats the above-mentioned processing, and is stopped. Clears the number corresponding to the instruction number stored in the predetermined area (or register) of the RAM 104 (number indicating the pushing order bell or pushing order corresponding to pushing order replay) (step S5208), and this reel stop management processing End S5190. When the number corresponding to the instruction number stored in the predetermined area is cleared, the display of the number-of-acquisitions display 72 is erased by the interrupt processing S570 described later. When it is determined that the combination of symbols of the winning combination is stopped on the activated line in the winning determination processing S559 executed after the reel stop management processing S5190, the number of payouts corresponding to the winning combination is It is stored in a predetermined area (or register) of the RAM 104, whereby the number of payouts is displayed on the acquired number display 72 by the interruption process S570. The timing at which the display of the number-of-acquisitions display 72 is erased is performed based on the fact that all reels have stopped, but the last reel stop operation has been accepted, and the last reel has stopped. The display may be erased based on the fact that all the reels have stopped and the result of the prize determination process has been received.

-Game end check process S5220-
The game end check process S5220 is a process of managing the state of a game to be executed by the main control unit 100 at the end of one game and the state of an effect (internal game state). When the game end check process S5220 is executed, the main control means 100 first executes a game state transition process (step S5221), as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 33, when the main control means 100 determines whether the current gaming state is the non-RT gaming state (step S5222) and determines that it is in the non-RT gaming state, it is shown in FIG. As shown, it is determined whether or not the specific symbol (specific symbol 01 to 05) is stopped and displayed on the activated line (step S5223). As described above, when determining that the specific symbol is stopped and displayed on the activated line, the main control means 100 shifts the gaming state to the RT1 gaming state (step S5224), and ends the gaming state transition processing S5221. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S5223 that the specific symbol is not displayed on the activated line, the main control means 100 determines whether the winning combination winning number is not "0"("1" for the winning combination winning number, "2"). "", Whether "3" is set or not), that is, it is determined whether or not the special role (BB1 to BB3) is won (step S5228), set "0" to the prize winning number If it is determined that the game is being played, the game state transition process S5221 ends. If it is determined in step S5228 that "0" is not set in the winning combination winning number (any one of "1", "2", and "3" is set in the winning combination setting number), The main control means 100 determines whether or not the combination of the special combination symbols is stopped and displayed on the effective line (step S5226), and when the combination of the special combination symbols is not stopped and displayed on the effective line The game state is shifted to the RT4 gaming state (internal gaming state) (step S5227), and when the combination of symbols of special characters is stopped and displayed on the activated line, the gaming state is RT5 gaming state (special gaming state) If the character set setting number is "1" or "2", it shifts to RT5-12 gaming state, and if the character set setting number is "3", it shifts to RT5-3 gaming state) (step S5228), To end the technique state transition processing S5221.

  Returning to FIG. 33, when determining that the current gaming state is not the non-RT gaming state in step S5222, the main control means 100 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the RT1 gaming state (step S5230). If it is determined that the game is in the game state, it is determined whether the symbol combination of the replay player combination 08 is stopped and displayed on the activated line (step S5231), and it is determined that the symbol combination of the replay player combination 08 is stopped and displayed. Then, the gaming state is shifted to the RT2 gaming state (step S5232). On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5231 that the combination of symbols of replay player combination 08 is not stopped and displayed on the activated line, main control means 100 sets "0" for the prize winning number as shown in FIG. It is judged whether or not it is not (step S5225), and when the prize winning number is set to "0", the game state transition process S5221 is ended. Further, when it is determined in step S5225 that "0" is not set in the winning combination winning number, the main control means 100 determines whether or not the combination of symbols of the special combination is stopped and displayed on the activated line. (Step S5226), when the combination of special symbol is not stopped on the activated line, the gaming state is shifted to RT4 gaming state (inside internal gaming state) (step S5227), and the special symbol is displayed. When the combination is stopped and displayed on the activated line, the gaming state is shifted to the RT5 gaming state (special gaming state, RT5-12 gaming state or RT5-3 gaming state) (step S5228), and the gaming state The transition process S5221 ends.

  Returning to FIG. 33, when determining that the current gaming state is not the RT1 gaming state in step S5230, the main control means 100 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the RT2 gaming state (step S5233). If it is determined that it is in the state, it is determined whether or not the combination of symbols of Replay combination 03 or Replay combination 04 has been stopped and displayed on the activated line (Step S5234), the symbols of Replay combination 03 or Replay combination 04 If it is determined that the combination is stopped and displayed, the gaming state is shifted to the RT3 gaming state (step S5235). Further, when it is determined in step S5234 that the combination of symbols of replays 03 or replays 04 is not stopped and displayed on the activated line, main control means 100 determines the combination of symbols of replays 02 on the activated line. If it is determined that the stop display is displayed (step S5237), and it is determined that the combination of symbols of replay player combination 02 is stop displayed, the gaming state is shifted to the RT1 gaming state (step S5238). The state transition process S5221 ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S5237 that the combination of symbols of replay player combination 02 is not stopped and displayed on the activated line, the main control means 100 causes the specific symbol to be stopped and displayed on the activated line as shown in FIG. It is judged whether or not it is (step S5223). Then, when determining that the specific symbol is stopped and displayed on the activated line, the main control means 100 shifts the gaming state to the RT1 gaming state (step S5224), and ends the gaming state transition process S5221. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S5223 that the specific symbol is not displayed on the activated line, the main control means 100 determines whether "0" is not set to the winning combination winning number (step S5225), When "0" is set to the winning combination winning number, the game state transition processing S5221 ends. Further, when it is determined in step S5225 that "0" is not set in the winning combination winning number, the main control means 100 determines whether or not the combination of symbols of the special combination is stopped and displayed on the activated line. (Step S5226), when the combination of special symbol is not stopped on the activated line, the gaming state is shifted to RT4 gaming state (inside internal gaming state) (step S5227), and the special symbol is displayed. When the combination is stopped and displayed on the activated line, the gaming state is RT5 gaming state (if it is a special gaming state and the feature setting number is “1” or “2”, RT5-12 gaming state, If the item setting number is "3", the game state is shifted to RT5-3 gaming state) (step S5228), and the gaming state transition process S5221 is ended.

  Returning to FIG. 33, when determining that the current gaming state is not the RT2 gaming state in step S5233, the main control means 100 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the RT3 gaming state (step S5236). If it is determined that it is in the state, the main control means 100 determines whether or not the combination of symbols of replay player combination 02 is stopped and displayed on the activated line (step S5237), and the combination of symbols of replay player combination 02 is stopped display If it is determined that the game is being played, the gaming state is shifted to the RT1 gaming state (step S5238), and the gaming state transition process S5221 is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S5237 that the combination of symbols of replay player combination 02 is not stopped and displayed on the activated line, the main control means 100 causes the specific symbol to be stopped and displayed on the activated line as shown in FIG. It is judged whether or not it is (step S5223). Then, when determining that the specific symbol is stopped and displayed on the activated line, the main control means 100 shifts the gaming state to the RT1 gaming state (step S5224), and ends the gaming state transition process S5221. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S5223 that the specific symbol is not displayed on the activated line, the main control means 100 determines whether "0" is not set to the winning combination winning number (step S5225), When "0" is set to the winning combination winning number, the game state transition processing S5221 ends. Further, when it is determined in step S5225 that "0" is not set in the winning combination winning number, the main control means 100 determines whether or not the combination of symbols of the special combination is stopped and displayed on the activated line. (Step S5226), when the combination of special symbol is not stopped on the activated line, the gaming state is shifted to RT4 gaming state (inside internal gaming state) (step S5227), and the special symbol is displayed. When the combination is stopped and displayed on the activated line, the gaming state is RT5 gaming state (if it is a special gaming state and the feature setting number is “1” or “2”, RT5-12 gaming state, If the item setting number is "3", the game state is shifted to RT5-3 gaming state) (step S5228), and the gaming state transition process S5221 is ended.

  In FIG. 33, when it is determined in step S5236 that the current gaming state is not the RT3 gaming state, the main control means 100 determines whether the current gaming state is the RT4 gaming state or not, as shown in FIG. Step S5240), If it is determined that the RT4 gaming state, it is determined whether the combination of symbols of special roles (BB1 to BB3) is stopped and displayed on the activated line (step S5241), and the combination of symbols of special roles is stopped When it is displayed, the gaming state is RT5 gaming state (if it is a special gaming state and the character setting number is “1” or “2”, the RT5-12 gaming state, the character setting number is “3” At the time, the game state is changed to RT5-3 gaming state) (step S5242), the gaming state transition processing S5221 is ended, and the combination of the special combination symbols is stopped and displayed. When there ends the game state transition process S5221.

  If it is determined in step S5240 that the current gaming state is not the RT4 gaming state, the current gaming state is the RT5 gaming state (RT5-12 gaming state or RT5-3 gaming state), so RT5 gaming state (RT5-12) The total number of game medals paid out since the game state or RT5-3 gaming state is entered is a predetermined number set according to the type of special role winning (for example, 334 BB1 cards) It is judged whether BB2 is over 238 pieces and BB3 is over 60 pieces (step S5243), and if it does not exceed, the game state transition processing S5221 is ended, and if it exceeds, the game state is not RT game The state is shifted to (step S5244), and the game state transition process S5221 is ended.

  Referring back to FIG. 32, when the gaming state transition process S5221 ends, the main control means 100 determines whether the current internal gaming state is "0" (step S5250), and the current internal gaming state is "0." If it is determined that "", as shown in FIG. 35, it is determined whether "0" is not set to the winning combination winning number (step S5251), "0" is set to the winning combination winning number If YES, it is determined whether the value of the AT stock counter CS is larger than 0 (step S5225). Then, when the value of the AT stock counter CS is larger than 0, 1 is subtracted from the AT stock counter CS (step S5253), and the flag value CF of the precursor game is counted to the precursor counter CF. The precursor game number determined in S5127 is set (step S5254), the internal gaming state is set to "1" (step S5255), and the game end check process S5220 is ended. If it is determined in step S5252 that the value of the AT stock counter CS is 0, the game end check process S5220 is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S5251 that "0" is not set in the winning combination winning number, the main control means 100 determines whether or not the combination of symbols of special roles is stopped and displayed on the activated line ( Step S5256), when the combination of special character symbols is stopped and displayed, the internal gaming state is set to "5" (step S5257), and when the combination of special character symbols is not stopped and displayed, internal The game state is set to "4" (step S5258), and the game end check process S5220 is ended.

  Returning to FIG. 32, when the main control means 100 determines in step S5250 that the current internal gaming state is not "0", it determines whether the current internal gaming state is "1" (step S5260), If it is determined that the current internal gaming state is "1", as shown in FIG. 35, it is determined whether "0" is not set to the winning combination winning number (step S5261), If "0" is set in the winning number, it is determined whether the value of the precursor game counter CF is 0 (step S5262). Then, when the main control means 100 determines that the value of the precursor game counter CF is 0, it sets the internal gaming state to "2" (step S5263), and determines that the value of the precursor game counter CF is not 0. When it is determined, 1 is subtracted from the precursor game counter CF (step S5268), and the game end check process S5220 is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S5261 that "0" is not set in the winning combination winning number, it is determined whether or not the combination of symbols of special roles is stopped and displayed on the activated line (step S5264). If it is determined in step S5264 that the combination of symbols of special roles is stopped and displayed, the internal gaming state is set to "7" (step S5265), and 1 is added to the AT stock counter CS (step S5) S5266). If it is determined in step S5264 that the combination of symbols of special roles is not stopped and displayed, the main control means 100 sets the internal gaming state to "6". Further, the main control means 100 subtracts 1 from the precursor game counter CF (step S5268), and ends the game end check process S5220.

  Referring back to FIG. 32, when the main control means 100 determines that the current internal gaming state is not "1" at step S5260, it determines whether the current internal gaming state is "2" (step S5270), If it is determined that the current internal gaming state is "2", as shown in FIG. 36, it is determined whether "0" is not set to the winning combination winning number (step S5271), If the winning number is set to "0", it is determined whether the current gaming state is the RT3 gaming state (step S5272). Furthermore, when the current gaming state is not the RT3 gaming state, the instruction number determined in the current gaming (Replaying the winning combination of C-C1 to C6 for transitioning from the RT2 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state) When the combination of symbols of the game combination 03 or the re-game combination 04 is stopped and displayed on the activated line, the pressing order (see FIG. 13) associated with the pressing order corresponding to the pressing order) and the player stop buttons 33a to 33c. It is determined whether or not the order of operating the keys matches (step S5273), and when it is determined that the current gaming state is the RT3 gaming state or that the instruction number and the player's operation do not match, the internal gaming state Is set to "3" (step S5274), and "50" is set to AT counter CA that counts the number of AT games played once (step S5275). Ryo to end the check processing S5220. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S5271 that "0" is not set in the winning combination winning number, it is determined whether or not the combination of symbols of special roles is stopped and displayed on the activated line (step S5276) When the combination of symbols of special part is stopped and displayed, the internal gaming state is set to "7" (step S5277), the AT stock counter CS is set to 1 (step S5278), and the game end check process S5220 Finish. If it is determined in step S5276 that the combination of symbols of special characters is not stopped and displayed, the internal gaming state is set to "6" (step S5279), and the game end check process S5220 is ended. In the case of a game capable of transitioning from the RT2 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state, the internal gaming state may be set to "3" at the end of the game regardless of the operation.

  Returning to FIG. 32, when the main control means 100 determines that the current internal gaming state is not "2" in step S5270, it determines whether the current internal gaming state is "3" (step S5280), If it is determined that the current internal gaming state is "3", as shown in FIG. 37, it is determined whether "0" is not set to the winning combination winning number (step S5281), If "0" is not set in the winning number, it is judged whether or not the combination of special symbol is displayed stopped on the activated line (step S5282), the combination of special symbol is displayed stopped. If it is, the internal gaming state is set to "7" (step S5283), the AT stock counter CS is set to 1 (step S5284), and 1 is subtracted from the AT counter CA (step S5) 295), to end the game end check processing S5220. If it is determined in step S5282 that the combination of special symbol is not stopped, the internal gaming state is set to "6" (step S5285), and 1 is subtracted from the AT counter CA (step S5295) ), The game end check process S5220 is ended. If it is determined in step S5281 that "0" is set in the winning combination, the main control unit 100 determines whether the value of the AT counter CA is "0" (step S5289). If the AT counter CA is not “0”, 1 is subtracted from the AT counter CA (step S5295), and the game end check process S5220 is ended. If it is determined in step S5289 that the value of AT counter CA is 0, main control means 100 determines whether the value of AT stock counter CS is greater than 0 or not (step S5290). When the value of the counter CS is larger than 0 (ie, the AT gaming right is stocked), 1 is subtracted from the AT stock counter CS (step S5291), and the precursor counter CF is set to "1" (step S5) S5292), the internal gaming state is set to "1" (step S5293), and the game end check process S5220 is ended. If it is determined in step S5290 that the AT stock counter CS is 0, the main control means 100 sets the internal gaming state to "0" (step S5294), and ends the game end check process S5220.

  Returning to FIG. 32, when the main control means 100 determines that the current internal gaming state is not "3" in step S5280, it determines whether the current internal gaming state is "4" (step S5300), When it is determined that the current internal gaming state is "4", as shown in FIG. 38, it is determined whether or not the combination of symbols of special roles is stopped and displayed on the activated line (step S5301), If the combination of symbols of the special combination is stopped and displayed, the internal gaming state is set to "5" (step S5302), and the game end check process S5220 is ended.

  Referring back to FIG. 32, when determining that the current internal gaming state is not "4" in step S5300, the main control means 100 determines whether the current internal gaming state is "5" (step S5310), When it is determined that the current internal gaming state is "5", as shown in FIG. 38, payout of gaming medals after transitioning to the RT5 gaming state (RT5-12 gaming state or RT5-3 gaming state) It is determined whether or not the total number of sheets exceeds the predetermined number set according to the type of special part winning the item (step S5311), and if it does not exceed the game ending check process S5220 is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S5311 that the total number of paid out game medals exceeds the predetermined number, the main control means 100 further determines whether the value of the AT stock counter CS is larger than 0 (step If the value of the AT stock counter CS is larger than 0, 1 is subtracted from the AT stock counter CS (step S5313), and the internal gaming state is set to "2" (step S5314), and the game end check process S5220 Finish. If it is determined in step S5312 that the value of the AT stock counter CS is 0, the main control unit 100 sets "0" to the internal gaming state (step S5315) and ends the game end check process S5220. .

  Returning to FIG. 32, when the main control means 100 determines that the current internal gaming state is not "5" in step S5310, it determines whether the current internal gaming state is "6" (step S5320), If it is determined that the current internal gaming state is "6", as shown in FIG. 38, it is determined whether or not the combination of symbols of special roles is stopped and displayed on the activated line (step S5321), When the combination of symbols of special role is stopped and displayed, the internal gaming state is set to "7" (step S5322), 1 is added to the AT stock counter CS (step S5323), and the game end check process S5220 is performed. finish.

  Returning to FIG. 32, when the main control means 10 determines in step S5320 that the current internal gaming state is not "6", the current internal gaming state is "7", as shown in FIG. The total number of payouts for game medals after transitioning to the RT5 gaming state (RT5-12 gaming state or RT5-3 gaming state) exceeds the predetermined number set according to the type of special role winning. It is judged whether or not it is not (step S5324), and when it does not exceed, the game end check process S5220 is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S 5324 that the total number of paid out game medals exceeds the predetermined number, the main control means 100 subtracts 1 from the AT stock counter CS (step S 5325), and the internal gaming state Is set to "2" (step S5326), and the game end check process S5220 is ended.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the combination of symbols of the special part is stopped and displayed on the effective line when the internal gaming state 3 is in progress (when AT gaming is being performed) The state shifts to state 6 or 7, and when the special game ends, the state shifts to the internal game state 2 (AT preparation), and when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the RT3 gaming state is reached), 50 games are set in the AT counter CA. It is transferred to the internal gaming state 3. Therefore, the internal gaming state 3 executed after the special game even if the value of the AT counter CA is not 0 in the internal gaming state 3 before shifting to the internal gaming state 6 or 7 (the number of AT gaming games remains). Fifty games are set in the AT counter CA, which is the number of games played (number of AT games played). Therefore, instead of setting 50 games in AT counter CA in step S5275 shown in FIG. 36 described above, 50 games are added to the current value of AT counter CA, that is, the number of remaining games in the previous AT game May be configured to newly add 50 games.

-Interrupt processing S570-
The main CPU 102 of the main control means 100 executes the above-mentioned game progress main process S550, but is configured to execute the interrupt process S570 at a predetermined interrupt interval. The interrupt process S570 is a process for updating the control counter, updating the soft random number, detecting the operation of the operation unit 30 or the like by the data from the input port, controlling the driving of the reels 21a to 21c, and transmitting the control command. is there.

  As shown in FIG. 39, when the interrupt processing S570 is executed, the main control means 100 first saves register values and prohibits duplicate interrupts as initial processing (step S571). Next, the main control means 100 detects the power-off according to the state of the input port since the signal output based on the power-supply voltage falling below the predetermined value is inputted to the input port by the power-off detection circuit. It is determined whether or not the power has been turned off (step S572), and when the power-off is detected, the power-off processing S5400 described later is executed. On the other hand, when the power-off is not detected, the control counter value is updated (step S573). The control counter is, for example, the above-mentioned fluctuation counter or interrupt counter. Further, the main control means 100 performs timer measurement (step S574). Specifically, the minimum game time measurement counter or a counter that measures the medal retention time is subjected to subtraction processing. Further, the main control means 100 executes display control processing of the 7-segment display (step S575). For example, as described above, the numerical value stored in the predetermined area (or register) of the RAM 104 is read from the acquired number display 72, and the numerical value is output to the acquired number display 72. When the predetermined area (or register) of the RAM 104 is cleared (for example, "0" is set), the acquired number indicator 72 is turned off or "0" is displayed. Here, when an error such as the opening of the front door 3 or an abnormality of the hopper occurs, the content of the error is displayed on the acquired number display 72 (for example, the characters "CE" and "HP" are displayed. ), Temporarily saves the information stored in a predetermined area (or register) of the RAM 104 to another area, stores information on an error in this area, and displays the number-of-acquisitions display by this interrupt processing S570. Display on 72. When the error is eliminated, the temporarily saved information (number corresponding to the content of the instruction) is returned to a predetermined area (or register) of the RAM 104, and the number-of-acquisitions indicator 72 is obtained in the interrupt processing S570. Display. Although not described in detail in the present embodiment, the slot machine 1 is provided with a seven-segment display for displaying a set value and the number of stored sheets, in addition to the acquired number display 72 described above. These light emission patterns are also controlled. Further, the main control means 100 performs a process of reading the information of the input ports 0 to 2 (step S576). By this processing, the operation system such as the bet button 31, the start lever 32, the stop buttons 33a to 33c, and the sensor system state of the selector and the hopper device are generated from the data read from the input port and stored in the RAM 104. Further, the main control means 100 controls operations such as rotation and stop for each of the reels 21a to 21c (steps S577 and S578), and performs port output processing (step S579). Specifically, excitation output values for operating the stepping motors (reel drive units 22a to 22c) for rotating the reels 21a to 21c, the hopper motor 70, and the blocker 60 are set as the output ports. Further, the main control means 100 executes a control command transmission process S5500 to be described later and transmits the control command stored in the control command buffer of the RAM 104 in the game progress main process S550 etc. to the sub control means 200 (step S580).

  Further, the main control means 100 sets external signal 1 data and external signal 2 data (data for outputting the above-mentioned BB signal and RB signal) stored in the RAM 104 in the register, and these external signals An external signal is output based on the 1 and 2 data (step S581). Further, the main control means 100 updates the soft random number value of the second random number generation means 190 described above, and performs update processing (subtraction) of the random number value to the reel rotation start waiting counter value (step S582). Finally, the register value saved in step S571 is restored, the next interrupt is permitted (step S583), and one interrupt processing S570 is ended.

-Power-off process S5400-
When the power-off process S5400 is executed, the main control means 100 turns off the outputs of all the output ports (step S5401) as shown in FIG. The disconnection processing flag is stored in the RAM 104 (step S5402). When the power-off process S5400 is executed, “1”, for example, is set in the power-off process flag. Then, the value of the control command read pointer (details will be described later) is set to an even number (step S5403). In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the same command is transmitted twice when transmitting the control command to the secondary control means 200. Therefore, if a power failure occurs when the control command is transmitted for the first time, the processing of the control command (setting process and transmission process) after power failure and recovery becomes complicated. The read pointer is set to an even value (specifically, the last bit of the write pointer value is set to 0) so that it can resume from. As described above, in the present embodiment, the value of the last bit is used to determine whether it is the first transmission or the second transmission. However, the first transmission and the second transmission are managed by the flag. You may For example, the transmission completion flag may be set when the first transmission is performed, and the transmission completion flag may be cleared when the second transmission is performed. Also, when a power failure occurs, the transmission completion flag is cleared so that it can be resumed from the first transmission again.

  Next, main control means 100 calculates checksum data for the entire range of RAM 104 (steps S5404 and S5405), stores this checksum data in RAM 104 (step S5406), and continues until the above-mentioned reset is performed. It waits (step S5407). When the power supply voltage is restored and the power supply voltage is restored after the power supply voltage drops and the power cut-off process S5400 is executed, a reset signal is output from the power supply voltage monitoring device provided in the main control means 100 and the slot machine 1 is restarted. It will be.

-Control command transmission process S5500-
The control command transmission process S5500 is executed in the interrupt process S570, and performs a process of transmitting the control command to the sub control unit 200. As shown in FIG. 40, first, the main control means 100 sets the start address of the control command buffer (the area to which the control command is written in the control command set 2 process S5010) in the register (step S5501), and further, the read pointer Is set in the register (step S5502), and the value of the read pointer (the value stored at the address of the read pointer) is added to the value of the register in which the start address is set, to thereby set the transmission control target. The address of the control command buffer in which the control command is stored is determined (step S5503). In step S5503, the value of the least significant bit is set to 0 (in binary, the logical product of 11111110 is performed). As a result, even when the read pointer is an even number, and when the odd number is one advanced from the even number, the same address as in the even number is obtained. That is, when the read pointer is an even number, the first transmission of the control command transmission is performed, and when the read pointer is an odd number, the second transmission can be performed on the same data. The start address of the control command buffer is assumed to be even. Then, it is determined whether or not the control command is stored by determining whether the value stored at this address is 0 (step S5504), and when the control command is not stored, this control is performed. The command transmission processing S5500 ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S5504 that the control command is stored, the address of the register (transmission register) for transmitting the control command to the sub control unit 200 is set in the register (step S5505). Read the data (upper 1 byte of control command) in the address (value set in the register) of the control command buffer, write this data to the address of the transmission register (set in the register), One is added to the address (value set in the register) of the control command buffer (step S5506). Furthermore, the data in the current address of the control command buffer (the lower 1 byte of the control command because the address is advanced by 1 in step S5506) is read, and this data is sent to the address of the transmission register. (Step S5507). When data is written to the transmission register, the data is transmitted to the sub control unit 200.

  Further, the main control means 100 determines whether the second transmission of the control command has been performed by determining whether the value of the read pointer is an odd number (step S5508), and the second transmission is performed. If the control command is performed, the value of the transmission target control command buffer in which the control command is stored is set to 0 and cleared (step S5509). Finally (in the first transmission and the second transmission), 1 is added to the value of the read pointer (step S5510), and the control command transmission processing S5500 is ended.

-Soft random number update process S5570-
The soft random number update process S5570 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, when the soft random number update process S5570 is called from the interrupt process S570, the game progress main process S550, etc., the current value of the soft random number is acquired from the second random number generation means 190 (step S5571). A predetermined addition value is added to the value (step S5572). Here, the addition value is a prime number and, for example, 10909 is used. By adding and updating such prime numbers, if it is a 2-byte random number value, it will become a different value at each update, and it will return to the initial value if it is updated 65536 times. Then, the initial value of the soft random number stored in the RAM 104 is acquired (step S5573), and the initial value is compared with the current value to which the addition value is added (step S5574). When the initial value and the current value match, an interrupt counter value which is counted each time the interrupt processing S570 is executed is acquired (step S5575). The current value is stored (step S5576), and the interrupt counter value is stored as an initial value (step S5577). Finally, the second random number is stored by storing the current value (the current value to which the update value is added in step S5572 or the current value to which the interrupt counter value is set in step S5576) as the soft random value (step S5578). The update of the random number value of the generation means 190 is ended.

  In the above description, “interrupt processing” means that the main CPU 102 of the main control means 100 interrupts the processing currently being performed and executes another processing, and the interrupt method is particularly important. There is no limitation (for example, a scheme such as hardware interrupt or software interrupt can be adopted).

(Sub control means 200)
In such a slot machine 1, the main control means 100 for controlling the game and the sub control means 200 for controlling the effect on the game are separated so that external influences can not be added to the result of the game. It is configured. Here, the sub control unit 200 includes the sub control substrate 300 and the image control substrate 400. Therefore, the main control unit 100 transmits, to the sub control unit 200, a control command including information on the game (control state) such as the above-mentioned winning result and the game state, in order to control the effect executed by the sub control unit 200. The effect control means 301 of the sub control board 300 which is configured to perform the sub control means 200 receives this control command, determines the aspect of the effect thereof, and the image display device which constitutes the effect means 40. 41 is configured to perform effects using images, light and sound effects, and symbols displayed on the reel display window 11 by the various effect lamps 42, the sound emitting unit (speaker) 43, the back lamp 44 and the sub operation switch 45 It is done.

  The sub control board 300 and the image control board 400 in the sub control means 200 are connected to the bus 210 as shown in FIG. The sub control board 300 is provided with a sub CPU 310, a random number generator 320, a RAM 330, a ROM 340, and an I / F circuit 350, which are connected to the bus 210. On the other hand, the image control board 400 is provided with a sub-sub CPU 410, an image control IC 420 and a sound source IC 460, which are controlled by the sub sub CPU 410 connected to the above-mentioned bus 210. The sub-sub CPU 410 has a ROM 495 for storing a program or the like to be executed by the image control board 400 and a RAM 490 for storing data or the like when the program is executed. Further, to the image control IC 420, a video RAM 430, an image ROM 440, a display circuit 450, and an image display device 41 are connected. The image control IC 420 is also called a "GPU (Graphics Processing Unit)", and the image ROM 440 is also called a "character ROM" or "CG-ROM". Also, a sound source ROM 470 and an amplifier 480 are connected to the sound source IC 460, and upper and lower speakers 43 (43a, 43b) are connected to the amplifier 480. Further, the above-described various effect lamps 42 (42a, 42b) and the back lamp 44 are also connected to the bus 210, and the lighting / extinguishing operation thereof is controlled by the sub control board 300. Further, to the bus 210, a sub operation switch 45 is connected. The sub operation switch 45 is for giving an instruction from the player to the effect to be executed on the sub control board 300 of the sub control means 200, and comprises, for example, a button and a direction key. For example, as shown in FIG. 1, the sub operation switch 45 is disposed above the stop buttons 33a to 33c.

  The sub CPU 310 develops the effect control program recorded in the ROM 340 into the RAM 330 and executes it, and transmits an effect command to the sub sub CPU 410 provided on the image control board 400, whereby the image control IC 420 can be controlled by the sub sub CPU 410. And, by controlling the sound source IC 460, the image display device 41 and the sound emitting unit 43 (43a, 43b) are configured to perform game effects by video and sound effects. The image displayed on the image display device 41 is displayed by the image control IC 420 expanding and executing the image information stored in the image ROM 440 in the video RAM 430, and the sound output unit 43 (43a, 43b The sound effects (music, voice, sound effects, etc.) output from the) are reproduced based on the sound information extracted by the sound source IC 460 from the sound source ROM 470 and output from the sound emitting unit 43 (43a, 43b) via the amplifier 480. Be done. Here, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the output of sound using the sound emitting unit 43 in the effect using the video displayed on the image display device 41 is transmitted from the sub CPU 310 of the sub control board 300 It is executed by the sub-sub CPU 410 of the image control board 400 based on the rendering command. Further, the effect (and the notification of an error) of only the output of the sound from the sound emitting unit 43 without using the image display device 41 is also executed by the sub-sub CPU 410 by the effect command transmitted from the sub CPU 310. Therefore, by using a sound source IC (sound chip) 460 mounted on the image control board 400 having a plurality of channels for outputting sound, it is possible to use the image display device 41 for a plurality of channels. Used for output (mainly output of sound by control of image control board 400) and output of sound of effect without using image display device 41 (mainly output of sound by control of sub control board 300) It is possible to prevent the use channels from overlapping between the sub control substrate 300 and the image control substrate 400 by allocating the channels (for example, in the case of the sound source IC 460 having 16 channels, 1 to 6 channels as the sub control substrate 300). And assign 7 to 16 channels to the image control board 400). Thus, the sub control board 300 has a function as a sound output instruction means, and the image control board 400 has a function as a sound output control means.

  As described above, the sub CPU 310 receives the control command transmitted from the main control unit 100 via the I / F circuit 350, and the effect executed by the sub CPU 310 is determined according to the control command. Although it is controlled, a part of the aspect (pattern) of this effect is configured to be determined using the random number value generated by the random number generator 320 provided on the sub control board 300.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the sub control board 300 includes effects control means 301 for executing effects, control command receiving means 302 for receiving control commands transmitted from the main control means 100, and effects for the image control board 400. An effect command transmission / reception means 303 for transmitting / receiving a command is provided. Further, the image control board 400 is provided with an image / sound output means 401 for controlling an image and a sound, and an effect command transmission means 402 for transmitting and receiving an effect command with the sub control board 300. As described above, the main control unit 100 is configured to transmit the same control command twice. Therefore, the secondary control board 300 may validate the control command when it receives two identical control commands (when it can receive only one, it is discarded as invalid). In this case, the reliability of the control command received from the main control means 100 is improved. Also, when any one control command can be received, the control command may be validated. Alternatively, even if part of two control commands is missing, that one control command can be reproduced from those control commands may be treated as valid. In this case, it is possible to prevent the drop of the control command transmitted from the main control means 100.

(Specific example of control of image control board 400 by sub control board 300)
Now, a specific example for controlling the operation of the image control board 400 by the sub control board 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, FIG. 41 is a flowchart of processing of the image control board 400 at the time of power on reset, FIG. 42 is a time chart of activation and runaway monitoring, and FIG. 43 is an image control board 400 from the sub control board 300. 44 is a flowchart when data is transmitted to the image processing apparatus, and FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the effect command.

-About activation-
When power is turned on, the sub CPU 310 of the sub control board 300 sends a reset signal to the sub sub CPU 410 of the image control board 400 to reset the image control board 400 (also referred to as "power on reset"). At this time, the sub-sub CPU 410 of the image control board 400 resets the image control IC 420, the sound source IC 460, and other peripheral circuits. Note that as a reset occurrence timing, a signal for monitoring the normal operation of the image control board 400 (hereinafter referred to as a "runaway monitoring signal") when an abnormality occurs in serial communication, which will be described later, other than when the power is turned on When an abnormality occurs, the above-mentioned setting change is performed and the sub control board 300 receives a control command related to the change of the setting value, or when an abnormality occurs in the sub control board 300 or the like. In addition, at the time of reset, various hardware settings of the image control board 400 and RAM initialization processing are always executed, and in any case, the procedure at the time of activation is surely executed by the reset. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 41, when the sub-sub CPU 410 of the image control board 400 receives the reset signal from the sub control board 300 and starts the power on reset process, it performs an interrupt setting process (interrupt mask). Then (step S700), setting processing of various hardware of the image control board 400 is performed (step S701). In addition, the sub-sub CPU 410 performs initialization processing of the RAM such as the video RAM 430 (step S702) and initialization processing of the image control IC 420 (step S703) to enable serial communication (step S704). Is started (step S705), and the character "in preparation of screen" is displayed on the image display device 41 (step S706). Note that the execution order of steps S700 to S706 may be arbitrary, and is not limited to the order shown in FIG. However, the output of the runaway monitoring signal in step S 705 starts when serial communication in step S 704 becomes possible and initialization of the image control IC 420 in step S 703 is completed (when boot is completed). Then, when the boot is completed, the sub-sub CPU 410 performs processing for transferring resident data to the video RAM 430 (step S 707). In the resident data transfer process S707, transfer of resident data is started (step S708), and it is monitored whether data transfer is completed (step S709). If it is determined that transfer of resident data is completed, image display is performed. The enable signal is turned on (step S710), and the process ends. Here, during transfer of the resident data, the sub-sub CPU 410 ignores transmission of a rendering command (hereinafter also referred to as “image system command”) relating to image display from the sub control board 300, and ignores the rendering command Hereinafter, the “sound system command” is also configured to be processed (basically, the sub control board 300 does not transmit the image system command during the power on reset). Note that the "screen preparation in progress" displayed in step S706 continues to be displayed until an effect command (image system command) for instructing image display is received from the sub control board 300.

-Start-up and runaway monitoring-
Next, the relationship between the power-on reset process and the runaway monitoring shown in FIG. 41 will be described with reference to FIG. At time t10, the sub control substrate 300 outputs a reset signal (the reset signal changes from a high voltage (H) to a low voltage (L) and returns to a high voltage (H)), and the sub sub CPU 410 When the reset signal is detected (time t11), the power on reset process described above is performed by the image control board 400. Here, when the above-described boot is completed (time t12), the sub-sub CPU 410 starts output of the runaway monitoring signal in step S705. The runaway monitoring signal is configured to switch between a high voltage (H) and a low voltage (L) each time the display of the image on the image display device 41 is switched (every frame). Then, the sub-sub CPU 410 starts transferring the resident data when the boot is completed (time t13), and switches the image display enable signal to a high voltage (H) when the transfer of the resident data is completed (time t15) (image display The enable signal is set to a low voltage (L) at initialization.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 310 of the sub control substrate 300 detects switching of the runaway monitoring signal four times (time t14), it determines that the start of the image control substrate 400 is completed. However, if it can not be determined that startup of the image control board 400 is completed even after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the output of the reset signal, the sub CPU 310 determines that the image control board 400 is abnormal and performs reset again. (Not shown in FIG. 43). When determining that the activation of the image control board 400 is completed, the sub CPU 310 permits transmission of a rendering command (serial communication) between the sub control board 300 and the image control board 400, and permits transmission of a sound system command. (Ie, from the completion of activation of the image control board 400 to the completion of transfer of resident data, the secondary control board 300 is configured to transmit only sound-related commands to the image control board 400).

  Next, when the sub CPU 310 of the sub control board 300 detects switching of the AND of the runaway monitoring signal and the image display enable signal four times (time t16), it determines that transfer of resident data in the image control board 400 is completed. However, if it can not be determined that the transfer of resident data is completed even after a predetermined time (for example, 70 seconds) has elapsed from the completion of activation of the image control board 400, the sub CPU 310 determines that the image control board 400 is abnormal and resets again. Configured (not shown in FIG. 13). When sub CPU 310 determines that the transfer of resident data is completed (when it is determined that the display preparation of image control board 400 is completed), transmission of image commands is permitted and image control board 400 operates normally. Enable monitoring of presence (also referred to as "watch dog timer (WDT) monitoring").

  Note that, after determining that the display control of the image control board 400 is completed, the sub CPU 310 of the sub control board 300 constantly monitors the above-mentioned WDT by monitoring the logical product of the runaway monitoring signal and the image display enable signal. I do. If the sub CPU 310 does not detect the switching of the signal for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds or more) in this WDT monitoring, it determines that the image control board 400 is abnormal (time t18 when 10 seconds have elapsed from time t17). If the sub CPU 310 determines that the image control board 400 is abnormal, the sub CPU 310 outputs a reset signal to reset the image control board 400, transmits an appropriate rendering command to the image control board 400 according to the subsequent state, and displays it. Wake up. In addition, the high and low (H / L) of the voltage of the reset signal and the like described above may be reversed.

-Communication method-
The effect command transmitted from the sub CPU 310 of the sub control board 300 to the sub sub CPU 410 of the image control board 400 has a 2-byte configuration (checksum is 1 byte), and is performed by serial communication. Here, as the communication format, for example, a start-stop synchronization method (parity (even parity), stop bit = 1 bit) of 8-bit data is used, and data is transmitted at a predetermined communication speed (for example, 38400 bits / sec) It is transmitted. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 43, sub CPU 310 sets 0 as the number of retries (step S720), and data stored in the transmission buffer is transmitted to sub sub CPU 410 one byte at a time (step S721). Here, a case will be described where a plurality of effect commands (totally n bytes) stored in the transmission buffer are transmitted collectively. Further, in the present embodiment, the most significant bit (MSB) of 1-byte data indicates whether the data or the checksum. When the MSB is 0, it indicates data, and when it is 1, it indicates a checksum. Then, when the n-byte data transmission is completed (when the checksum is finally transmitted), sub CPU 310 sets a time (reception waiting time) for waiting for reception of the response signal (ACK) from sub sub CPU 410 (step S722). ).

  Although not shown in FIG. 43, the sub-sub CPU 410 of the image control board 400 which has received the above-mentioned data receives the reception queue shown in FIG. This data is taken out, the number of commands included in the data transmitted from the sub CPU 310 and the checksum are checked, and when there is an abnormality, a response signal of a reception error is transmitted. On the other hand, when the number of commands and the checksum are normal, the received command is stored in the reception buffer shown in FIG. 44, and the checksum received as a response signal of normal reception is transmitted to the sub CPU 310. Although the data is taken out by the interrupt process executed at predetermined time intervals, the process of taking out may be executed when the reception of the rendering command transmitted from the sub control board 300 is detected. . Alternatively, it may be configured to execute a process of detecting and extracting that the secondary control board 300 has transmitted the rendering command.

  Then, the sub CPU 310 of the sub control board 300 determines whether or not the reception waiting time has exceeded the predetermined threshold and has timed out (step S723), and if it has not timed out, is there any received data from the sub sub CPU 410? It is determined whether or not there is reception data (step S724), and when there is reception data, it is determined whether it is a response signal of normal reception (step S725). If the response signal from the sub-sub CPU 410 indicates the normal reception, the transmission completion is set (step S 726), and the data transmission process is ended. If it is determined in step S724 that there is no reception, the process returns to step S723. If it is determined in step S723 that a timeout has occurred, or if it is determined in step S725 that the response signal does not indicate normal reception, 1 is added to the number of retries (step S727), and the current number of retries is a predetermined number (for example, It is determined whether or not it exceeds 3) (step S728). Here, when the number of retries is three or less, recovery processing is performed (step S729). Specifically, sub CPU 310 can transmit dummy checksum data to sub sub CPU 410 and monitor whether or not a response signal is received from sub sub CPU 410 before the time-out occurs, and can receive a response signal. If it is determined that communication has been recovered, data is transmitted again according to the above procedure. On the other hand, when the number of retries exceeds three, a communication reset request is set (step S730).

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the maximum number of transmission bytes in one continuous transmission (up to the transmission of a checksum) is set to, for example, 15 bytes including a checksum. Therefore, in the case of performing one control by a plurality of control commands (for example, in the case where one command group is configured by four bytes of data by setting two commands as one command group), This command group may be transmitted across the frame on the sub-sub CPU 410 side.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in addition to the transmission of the rendering command from the sub CPU 310 of the sub control board 300 to the sub sub CPU 410 of the image control board 400, the sub sub CPU 410 of the image control board 400 Although transmission of the rendering command to the sub CPU 310 is also performed, the communication method is as described above. However, the checksum may not be performed. In addition, the data size that can be transmitted and received in one communication may be transmitted from the sub control board 300 to the image control board 400 or transmitted from the image control board 400 to the sub control board 300 according to the amount of data to be transmitted and received. (For example, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, since the amount of data to be transmitted from the sub control board 300 to the image control board 400 is larger, a data size that can be transmitted and received in one communication. Also, the transmission from the sub control board 300 to the image control board 400 is configured to be larger, and the transmission of a command from the sub control board 300 to the item control board 360 can also be realized by the method described above. .

-About the production command-
As described above, the data transmitted from the sub CPU 310 of the sub control board 300 is temporarily stored in the reception queue of the image control board 400 and then moved to the reception buffer, as shown in FIG. Then, 2 bytes of data with the most significant bit (MSB) of 0 are assembled into 2 bytes each and stored as a rendering command in the command buffer, and image commands are stored in the image command buffer, and sound commands are stored in the sound command buffer. It memorize | stores (In FIG. 44, the command 1, 2, 4, 6 is an image system command and the case where commands 3, 5, and 7 are sound system commands is shown.). By storing the image command and the sound command in separate buffers as described above, it is possible to prevent the delay of the output of the sound (sound) due to the image system being dropped or waiting for loading.

(Control of processing by sub control board 300)
Control of processing in such a sub control substrate 300 will be specifically described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing the flow of sub main loop processing executed by the sub control substrate 300. The sub CPU 310 of the sub control board 300 is configured to repeatedly execute the sub main loop processing shown in FIG. 46 (in this embodiment, it is configured to repeat this processing every approximately 16 milliseconds, The processing of the times is called "frame"). The transmission of the rendering command to the image control board 400 and the process of receiving the response signal transmitted from the image control board 400 in response to the transmission are performed at an interruption of one millisecond.

  When the processing of one frame is started, the sub CPU 310 of the sub control board 300 performs control to turn on a lamp (effect lamp 42, back lamp 44 or the like) and output a sound (step S740). In addition, monitoring of the liquid crystal unit (image display device 41 and image control IC 420 for controlling the same, etc.) (step S741), monitoring of the state of the amplifier (sound source IC 460 and amplifier 480) (step S742) The bus 210 etc.) is monitored (step S743). Further, the sub CPU 310 executes processing to be executed for each frame (step S744). Then, if the control command transmitted from the main control unit 100 is in the command buffer at the remaining time of the frame currently being executed, one control command is taken out from the command buffer, and processing according to the control command ( Sending a rendering command to the image control board 400) and the rendering command transmitted from the image control board 400 from the command buffer, processing according to the rendering command (step S745), and lottery or determination of the rendering, Remaining time processing (step S746) such as updating of random numbers and setting of rendering command to be sent to the image control board 400 is executed, and when it is determined that 16 ms has elapsed and one frame has ended, the process returns to step S700 described above. Are repeated (step S747).

  In the above description, “interrupt processing” means that the sub-CPU 310 of the sub-control board 300 of the sub-control means 200 interrupts the process currently being performed and executes another process. The interrupt method is not particularly limited (for example, a method such as a hardware interrupt or a software interrupt can be adopted).

(About control in sub control means 200)
As described above, the sub control board 300 performs execution control of the effect based on the control command transmitted from the main control means 100. At this time, a rendering command is transmitted to the image control board 400 to control the operation (image display, etc.) of the image display device 41. Hereinafter, the configuration of effect commands transmitted and received between the sub control substrate 300 and the image control substrate 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, FIG. 46 is an explanatory view showing a configuration of a rendering command, FIG. FIG.

-About the production command-
In the slot machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 46A, the effect command is represented by a 2-byte (16-bit) data string. Here, the classification number is represented by three bytes of 14 bits to 12 bits, and the usage of the command is classified. In FIG. 46 (b), as an example of command classification number, 0 system command whose upper 4 bits are "0", 1 system command which becomes "1", 3 system command which becomes "3", "4" It shows 4 system commands as follows, 5 system commands as "5" and 6 system commands as "6". For example, the 0-system command is represented as "0x0 ***". The command expressed in hexadecimal notation is indicated by adding "0x" at the beginning. Also, "*" indicates that an arbitrary number (0 to 9 in the case of hexadecimal, A to F) is entered. The 0-system command is an effect command for notifying and controlling an operation (for example, used as a command for error or inspection system command, and notification of reel rotation / stop and stop button operation). Also, the 1-system command is the above-described sound-based presentation command. Also, the 3 system command is a numerical value / count system effect command, and is used as a command for notifying the number of remaining games of the special game and the like. The 4 system command is an effect command for notifying the content of the effect, the 5 system command is an effect command for notifying the type of the effect, and the 6 system command is the type of the effect during AT · bonus It is an effect command for notifying. In the slot machine 1 according to this embodiment, as will be described later, 4-system and 5-system commands or 4-system and 6-system commands are used as a set.

  FIG. 47 shows an example of the correspondence between the effect numbers for specifying effects and the 4 system and 5 system or 6 system commands. As described above, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, one effect can be specified by a combination of 4-system commands and 5-system commands, or a combination of 4-system commands and 6-system commands. For example, an effect having an effect number of “1” can be specified as “0x5001” as a 5 system command and “0x4000” as a 4 system command, and the image control board 400 receives this 5 system command and 4 system command. Then, at the time of operation of the start lever 32, and at the time of rotation of the reels 21a to 21c, the effect using the image display device 41 is not executed, but at the first stop (stop first performed among the three stop buttons 33a to 33c) During the second stop, the conversational effect performed at the first stop is continued, and at the third stop, the images for the stop of all the reels 21a to 21c and the bet for the next game are performed. It indicates that the effect using the display device 41 is not performed. Also, the effect with the effect number “1961” can be specified as “0x500A” as a 5 system command and “0x4000” as a 4 system command, and the image control apparatus 400 receives this 5 system command and 4 system command. Then, effect 1 is executed when the start lever 32 is operated, effect 2 at the first stop, effect 3 at the second stop, and effect 4 at the third stop, and at the stop of all the reels 21a to 21c and the next game Indicates that the effect 5 is to be executed at the time of betting for. In addition, the effect with the effect number "3653" can be specified as "0x6000" as a 6 system command and "0x4000" as a 4 system command, and the image control apparatus 400 receives this 6 system command and 4 system command. Then, the navigation screen is output when the start lever 32 is operated, and the corresponding information in the navigation screen is erased in each of the first stop, the second stop and the third stop, and all the reels 21a to 21c are stopped. It shows that the navigation success effect is executed at the time of betting for the time and next game.

  In addition, when the number of effects is large, as described above, these effects can be efficiently managed by determining the effects to be executed by the combination of the 5-series command or the 6-series command and the 4-series command. When the number of effects is small, it is also possible to configure so as to determine the effects to be executed by only the 4 system command. Alternatively, it is possible to assign an effect to each of the 4 system command, 5 system command, and 6 system command.

  As shown in FIGS. 48 (a) and 48 (b), the 0 system command is a command for notifying an error (FIG. 48 (a)), the reels 21a to 21c managed by the main control unit 100, and the stop button 33a. And a command (FIG. 48 (b)) for notifying of the operation or operation for .about.33c. Here, among the commands relating to the first to third stop acceptances, a portion in which “#” is indicated indicates information indicating which of the three reels 21 a to 21 c is the reel on which the operation is performed (reception reels). It is. Specifically, "0" is set in the case of the left reel 21a, "1" is set in the case of the middle reel 21b, and "2" is set in the case of the right reel 21c. For example, when the left reel 21a is operated as the first stop, "0x0501" is obtained. The “timing at the start of reel rotation” is the timing at which the predetermined weight ends and the rotation of the reels 21 a to 21 c is actually started after the operation of the start lever 32 is received. Further, the timing at the time of the first to third stops is when the stop operation is received in each of the stop buttons 33a to 33c. Further, "the timing when all reels are stopped" is when all the reels 21a to 21c are stopped and excitation is released, and the stop buttons 33a to 33c are not pressed (released). .

  The third system command is a command for notifying a numerical value. For example, "0x3200" shown in FIG. 48 (c) is a command for notifying the current number of games (for example, the number of special game games etc.), and two commands "0x30 **" and "0x31 **" The number of games can be notified by being transmitted together with the command. "0x30 **" is used to notify the lower 7 bits of the number of games, and "0x31 **" is used to notify the upper 7 bits. At the time of transmission, transmission is performed in the order of “0x30 **”, “0x31 **”, and “0x3200”. By changing “0x3200” to another command, it is possible to notify the number of AT game play and the like.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the timing (including switching) of the execution (including the switching) of the effect (determined by the fourth system command, the fifth system command, and the sixth system command in the above-described example) is associated with the command classification number. Thus, it is configured to be switchable. For example, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the reels 21a to 21c start rotating, receiving the first stop, receiving the second stop, receiving the third stop, and stopping the rotation of all the reels 21a to 21c. In order to notify the image control board 400 of the state, a 0-system command is transmitted from the secondary control board 300.

(Output of image and sound of image control board 400)
As described above, the image control board 400 causes the image display device 41 to display an image based on the rendering command transmitted from the sub control board 300, and outputs the sound, music, sound effects, etc. from the speaker 43. It is configured to do. The processing of the image control board 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, FIG. 49 shows an example of use of the storage area of the video RAM 430, FIG. 50 shows a data structure of image data, and FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing a flow of sub sub loop processing executed by the sub sub CPU 410 of the image control board 400. 52 is a flowchart of command analysis processing, FIG. 53 is a flowchart of drawing command list creation processing, FIG. 54 is a flowchart of drawing processing executed by the image control IC 420, and FIG. 55 is an image ROM 440 It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the image memorize | stored in.

-Sub sub loop processing S800-
In the image control board 400, the sub sub loop processing S800 executed by the sub sub CPU 410 creates a drawing command list for displaying an image on the image display device 41 based on the rendering command transmitted from the sub control means 300. Then, the drawing command list is sent to the image control IC 420 to instruct the start of drawing. Then, the drawing process executed by the image control IC 420 expands (draws) the image to be displayed on the frame buffer of the video RAM 430 based on the drawing command list, and the expansion (drawing) is completed. The frame buffer of the video RAM 450 is configured to output the developed (drawn) image. Here, the process of writing an image of one frame to be displayed on the image display device 41 in the frame buffer of the video RAM 450 is referred to as “expansion” or “drawing”. The configuration of the data area of the video RAM 450 shown in FIG. 49 is an example. Here, the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes two frame buffers (a frame buffer 0 indicated by reference numeral 430d and a frame buffer 1 indicated by reference numeral 430e), and the image control IC 420 is provided in one frame buffer. The display circuit 450 is configured to output the contents of the other frame buffer to the image display device 41 when developing (drawing) an image. Switching between a frame buffer for developing (drawing) an image and a frame buffer for outputting an image is called "swap". Further, in the present embodiment, the video RAM 450 has an arbitrary area 430a and a temporary area 430b as an expansion area for expanding (drawing) an image in a frame buffer (an unused area 430c may be present). In addition, the display circuit 450 causes the image display device 41 to display the contents of the frame buffer at predetermined time intervals (for example, every 1/60 second), and repeats the process of performing the swap. One display from the frame buffer to the image display device 41 is called a "frame". In addition, the display circuit 450 is configured to output a signal of V blank interrupt described later to the sub-sub CPU 410 every time display of one frame is completed (every 1/60 seconds).

  Also, the image and sound data output by the image control board 400 are managed in the hierarchical structure shown in FIG. Specifically, a plurality of trigger data are managed for each of the effect numbers described above (in other words, for each effect specified by the 5 or 6 system command and 4 system command). The trigger data is data managed for each trigger switching the effect, and the “start lever operation (lever operation)”, “rotation start”, “first stop”, “second stop”, “second stop” in FIG. It is managed at every opportunity of "third stop" and "all stop". Each trigger data has a plurality of scene data, and each scene data has a plurality of motion data. The motion data is data obtained as to how each image data behaves in each frame. The data for managing the image and the sound are stored in the RAM 490 and the ROM 495, the image displayed on the image display device 41 is stored in the image ROM 440, and the voice / music output from the speaker 43 is stored in the sound source ROM 470. .

  The sub sub CPU 410 of the image control board 400 repeatedly executes the sub sub loop processing S800 shown in FIG. First, the sub-sub CPU 410 transmits a drawing command to the image control IC 420 together with the drawing command list (which is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 490 as described later) which has already been created (step S801). The image control IC 420 that has received the drawing command executes the drawing process as described later. Then, in parallel with the image control IC 420 performing the drawing process, the sub-sub CPU 410 executes a command analysis process S8000 (step S802). As shown in FIG. 52, the command analysis processing S 8000 takes out the rendering command from the command buffer (step S 8001), and determines whether the rendering command is a key command (step S 8002). The command is temporarily stored in the RAM 490 (step S8003), and when the effect command is buffered in the command buffer (step S8012), the process returns to step S8001 to process the next effect command. As described with reference to FIG. 48C, for example, when numerical data is notified, a command of 0x30 ** indicating lower 7 bits of data and 0x31 ** indicating upper 7 bits of data are indicated. It consists of a command and a command of 0x3200 (in this case, it indicates that it is the current game number) which indicates what data the upper and lower 14 bits of data are, 0x30 **, 0x31 ** Transmitted in the order of 0x3200. Therefore, as described above, when one command is given by a plurality of commands, the last command (here, 0x3200) to be sent is used as a key command, and the command taken out from the buffer until this key command appears Is configured to temporarily save. When no effect command is stored in the buffer in step S8001, the sub-sub CPU 410 ends the command analysis process S8000.

  If it is determined in step S8012 that the effect command extracted from the buffer is a key command, the sub-sub CPU 410 determines the type of the key command (step S8004), and executes processing in accordance with the determined type. First, when it is determined that the key command is a system command (error / check system command among 0 system commands), it is a process (for example, a door error display command (0x012B) executed according to the command. If so, the process of displaying the screen "the door is open" is determined (step S8005), and the process proceeds to step S8012. If it is determined that the key command is a sound command (system 1 command), an instruction (command to the sound source IC) corresponding to the sound command is stored in the sound output write buffer (step S8006) Proceed to step S8012. If it is determined that the key command is a numeric command (3 system command), the corresponding data on the RAM 490 is updated (step S8007), and the process proceeds to step S8012. For example, if it is the number of AT game games, the data of the area on the RAM 490 which manages the number of AT game games is updated. When it is determined that the key command is a rendering command (5 system, 6 system, 4 system command), rendering data is acquired from the ROM 495 and temporarily stored in a predetermined area (for example, a reproduction reservation buffer) of the RAM 490. If it is stored (step S8008) and the key command is a frame update target command, the command analysis processing S8000 ends, and if it is not a frame update target command, the process proceeds to step S8012 (step S8009). As shown in FIG. 47, in the present embodiment, one effect is defined by a 5-system command and a 4-system command, or a 6-system command and a 4-system command. It is configured to transmit in the order of system commands or in the order of 6 system commands and 4 system commands. Therefore, this 4-system command is a frame update target command. When it is determined that the key command is a trigger command (a command related to the rotation / stop of the reel of 0 system commands), the trigger data of the corresponding trigger is selected from the effect data stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 490. It reads out and judges whether there is scene data for this trigger (step S8010). When there is scene data, the corresponding scene data is read out from the ROM 495 and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 490 (step S8011). The process S8000 ends. If the process advances to step S8012, the process according to the type of command described above is repeated until there is no buffer command.

  Referring back to FIG. 51, when the command analysis process S8000 of step S801 ends, the sub-sub CPU 410 executes a drawing command list creation process S8020 based on the analysis result (step S803). As shown in FIG. 53, the sub-sub CPU 410 acquires scene data from a predetermined area of the RAM 490, and advances frame of motion data by updating frame information of motion data held by the scene data. This process is called motion increment (step S8021). Then, a user callback is executed to read out the numerical data notified as the above-described 3-system command or the like (step S8022), and based on the motion data and the numerical data, drawing is an instruction of image display (development) for the current frame. A command is generated and stored as a drawing command list in a predetermined area (for example, a drawing list area) of the RAM 490 (step S8023), and the drawing command list creation process S8030 is ended. In the present embodiment, the drawing process described later is configured to execute drawing commands in the order stored in the drawing command list. Therefore, the command stored first in the drawing command list will be described as the top command.

  Referring back to FIG. 51, the sub-sub CPU 410 executes a sound periodic process (step S804). Specifically, a process of writing the instruction stored in the write buffer in step S8006 of the command analysis process S8000 described above into the register of the sound source IC 460 is executed. When an instruction is written to the register of the sound source IC 460, voice, music, sound effects, and the like are output from the speaker 43 according to the instruction. Further, the sub-sub CPU 410 determines whether or not the drawing process by the image control IC 420 has been completed (step S805), and if already completed, the process immediately proceeds to step S806, and if not completed, the process is terminated. Wait for and proceed to step S806. The end of drawing by the image control IC 420 is determined by receiving a signal indicating that the drawing transmitted from the image control IC 420 is ended, as described later. Further, the sub-sub CPU 410 detects the V blank interrupt from the display circuit 450, and waits until the first write position in the frame is reached (step S806). In the present embodiment, when two V blank interrupts are detected, the process proceeds to step S 807. Then, the sub-sub CPU 410 transmits the above-mentioned runaway monitoring signal to the sub control board 300 (step S 807), and executes frame buffer swapping (step S 808). By executing this swap, as described above, the image output to the image display device 41 is executed from the frame buffer (one of the frame buffer 0 or 1) drawn by the image control IC 420 according to the instruction in step S801. At the next step S801, the next drawing (drawing by the drawing command list created at step S803 described above) is performed on the frame buffer (the other of frame buffer 0 or 1) on which the previous output was performed. It will be.

-Drawing process S8030-
When a drawing start instruction is transmitted from the sub-sub CPU 410 in step S801 of the above-described sub-sub-loop processing S800, the image control IC 420 transmits image data to the video RAM 430 based on the drawing command list transmitted along with the drawing start instruction. Perform drawing (expansion). The drawing command list transmitted from the sub-sub CPU 410 is stored in a predetermined storage area of the image control IC 420 or in a predetermined area of the video RAM 430.

  As shown in FIG. 54, the image control IC 420 acquires the drawing command list one command at a time from the beginning (step S8031), and executes processing according to the type of the acquired command (step S8032). In the present embodiment, the commands stored in the drawing command list mainly consist of “transfer” and “drawing”, and basically “transfer” and “drawing” become one set. (The data (image) transferred from the image ROM 440 is drawn in the frame buffer). However, the configuration of such a command is only an example, and in addition, "setting" and other commands are included (detailed explanation will be omitted).

  When the command acquired in step S8031 is data transfer for a moving image, data (image) corresponding to the command is read from the image ROM 440 (step S8033), and is the read image (moving image) compressed? It is determined whether or not the file is compressed (step S8043), and if it is compressed, decoding processing is performed to restore it (step S8035). Then, the image (moving image) read from the image ROM 440 or the decoded image (moving image) is stored in the temporary area 430b of the video RAM 430 (step S8041), the processing for this command ends, and the process proceeds to step S8045. The image stored in the temporary area 430b is drawn in the frame buffer (430d or 430e) by processing for the next command "draw".

  If the acquired command is data transfer for a still image, data (still image) for the command is read from the image ROM 440 (step S 8037), and the data is decoded according to the format of the read image (still image) Processing is performed (step S8038), and the type of frame of this image (still image) is determined (step S8039). When the frame type is I frame, the decoded data is stored in temporary area 430b of video RAM 430 (step S8040), and when it is P frame, it is stored in arbitrary area 430a of video RAM 430 (step S8041). ), The processing for this command ends, and the process proceeds to step S8045. Here, the I frame indicates that the image is information of one frame, and the P frame indicates difference information from the currently displayed image. Therefore, in the processing for the next command "draw", it is drawn from the temporary area 430b as it is from I-frame to the frame buffer (430d or 430e) and is stored in the current temporary area 430b for P-frame. The I-frame information is updated with the P-frame information stored in the arbitrary area 430a, and the updated I-frame information is drawn in the frame buffer (430d or 430e).

  If the acquired command is the setting of the drawing parameter, this parameter is set in the register of the image control IC 420 (step S8042), the processing for this command is ended, and the process proceeds to step S8045. For example, the processing of the next sprite drawing is controlled by this parameter.

  Furthermore, when the acquired command is sprite rendering, the texture is processed on a temporary area which is a virtual drawing space (step S8043), and the processed image or the above-mentioned still image or moving image is a temporary expansion area. The image is read from the area 430b or the arbitrary area 430a, and drawn to the frame buffer of the video RAM 430 (the frame buffer (430d or 430e of the frame buffer 0 and the frame buffer 1 selected as the writing destination)) (step S8044) The process for the command is completed, and the process proceeds to step S8045. The display circuit 450 is configured to output the contents of the frame buffer selected as the output source (frame buffer not selected as the write destination) to the image display device 41.

  When one of the above-described processes for the command currently read out is completed, the image control IC 420 determines whether or not the command remains in the drawing command list (step S 8045). If it remains, the process proceeds to step S 8031. Return, fetch the next command and repeat the above process. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S8045 that no command in the drawing command list remains, a signal indicating that drawing is finished is transmitted to the sub-sub CPU 410 (step S8046), and the drawing processing S8030 ends. The sub-sub CPU 410 determines in step S805 described above whether or not a signal indicating that the drawing has ended is received.

  The image rendered (expanded) in the video RAM 430 as described above is output to the image display device 41 at a predetermined cycle (as described above, for example, every 1/60 seconds).

-Relationship between drawing command list and displayed image-
As described above, the image control IC 420 is configured to draw an image on the video RAM 430 based on a command included in the drawing command list transmitted from the sub-sub CPU 410. At this time, when there are a plurality of images to be written to the frame buffer, and when some or all of them overlap, the image written to the frame buffer later is given priority (the previously written image and the later written If the two images overlap, the last written image is displayed. Therefore, in the drawing command list creation process S803 of the sub sub loop process S800 executed by the sub sub CPU 410, the command of the image to be displayed by prioritizing the other image is higher than the command for the other image in the drawing command list. It is necessary to be configured to be placed behind (a position in the drawing command list that is read and processed later than commands for other images).

  For example, as shown in FIG. 55 (b), an image for notifying the pressing order, in this case, an image consisting of “1 · 2 · 3” indicating the operating order of the stop buttons 33a to 33c (hereinafter referred to as “pressing order And an image (hereinafter referred to as “decorative image”) to decorate this push-ordered image, as shown in FIG. 55 (c), here individually. The case where it is stored in the image ROM 440 is shown. As shown in FIG. 55 (d), the image of “1” can be read out from the push order image, the image of “Δ” can be read out from the decoration image, and these can be displayed in combination. The image of 2 ”can be read out, the image of“ o ”can be read out from the decoration image, and these can be combined and displayed. Thus, by storing the push order image and the decoration image separately, it is possible to increase the variation of the image when notifying the push order, and to reduce the storage capacity of these images in the image ROM 440. . Here, in the notification of such push order, it is necessary to display the push order image prior to the decoration image, so in the present embodiment, the decoration image is drawn in the drawing command list. The command is placed before the command for drawing the push order image (The decoration image command is placed on the top side of the drawing command list, and the push order image command behind the decoration image command is Are arranged to be arranged). The generation of the drawing command list in consideration of the priority order of such images may be configured to generate commands according to the priority order and add them to the drawing command list, and drawing may be performed without considering the priority order. The command list may be generated and then sorted according to the priority (sorted in such a way that the lower priority is placed at the top). Also, when there is a background image as shown in FIG. 55 (a), the command for drawing the background image is placed in front of the decoration image or the push order image (on the top side), as shown in FIG. 55 (g). As shown in FIG. 4, the push order image can be displayed preferentially.

  Here, the pushing order image is determined by the instruction number (the pushing order information) transmitted from the main control unit 100. In addition, the decoration design is decided with the information other than the information of pushing order. For example, it can be determined according to the type (bell or replay) of the winning combination determined by the effect group number, or according to the stage or mode of the effect currently being executed, the level, availability of addition, expectation, etc. Can also be determined. In addition, the decoration image is not only a graphic such as “Δ · □ · ○” as described above, but also includes attribute information of a color or an operation mode (a movement when displayed, etc.).

(Notice of push order by sub control means 200)
As described with reference to FIG. 13, when the player is elected to replay player combination C1 to C6, replay player combination F1 to F5, winning combination -A1 to A6 and winning combination -B1 to B6, the main control means 100 An instruction number is determined from the winning combinations, and the instruction number and the effect group number are transmitted to the sub control means 200 as a control command. Then, the sub control means 200 is configured to determine and display the content to be displayed on the image display device 41 based on the instruction number and the effect group number (the image display device of FIG. 13 (b)). Instruction content). For example, when the player wins the re-play role-C1, the instruction number is “A1” and the effect group number is “3”, so the display “(1 · 2 · 3)” shows the image display device 41 Output to Since it is possible to determine from the effect group number whether the winning combination is the re-playing combination or the winning combination, as described above, when displaying the instruction content on the image display device 41, depending on the type of winning combination. It is also possible to constitute so that the color at the time of the display may be changed, or a decoration pattern may be changed. For example, as shown in FIG. 13 (a), assuming that the instruction number when winning a replay player-F5 is "A9", the instruction number when winning a winning combination-B5 is also "A9". Even if the winning combination is won, the main control means 100 displays “9” on the acquired number display 72. At this time, the sub-control unit 200 causes the image display device 41 to display the instruction content "(--- 1)", but when the effect group number is "8" (replay role-F5) , The color of the instruction content is displayed in red (or the decoration symbol of "o" is selected), and when the effect group number is "10" (when the winning combination-B5), the color of the instruction content is displayed in blue It can be configured to do (or to select a decorative symbol of "」 "). Thereby, in the display of the instruction content by the sub control means 200, it is also possible to notify the kind of winning combination (for example, whether it is a re-play combination or a winning combination). Note that the instruction numbers determined by the main control means 100 may be set to be different numbers in the same push order and in the push order bell and the push order replay (for example, in the case of push order bell, FIG. 13 ( As shown in b), they may be configured to be A0 to A9, and may be configured to be A10 to A19 at the time of order replay.

(Example of control command, effect command and image displayed on image display device 41)
Then, transmission of a control command and an effect command when a push order bell or push order replay is won, and an example of an image displayed thereby on the image display device 41 are used together with FIGS. 56 to 61. It explains along the flow of the game. Here, FIG. 56 shows the transmission timing of the control command and the rendering command with respect to the operation timing of the start lever 32 and the stop buttons 33a to 33c when notifying the pressing order, and FIG. 57 shows the transition of the screen at this time. 58 shows the transmission timing of the control command and effect command when the first stop fails, FIG. 59 shows the transition of the screen at this time, and FIG. 60 shows the control command when the door is opened in the middle of the game and FIG. 61 shows the transmission timing of the effect command, and FIG. 61 shows the transition of the screen at this time. In the following description, in addition to the background image, the push order image and the decoration image shown in FIG. 55 described above, the push order result image shown in FIG. 55 (e) and the error image shown in FIG. 55 (f) are used. Explain. These images are also stored in the image ROM 440. In addition, the image shown in FIG. 55 is an example, and the image of a character, the image of a comment, etc. can also be displayed. The priority of such an image is set to be higher than that of the background image and lower than that of the push order image and the decoration image.

-When operated in correct order-
First, using FIG. 56 and FIG. 57, the transmission timing of the control command and effect command at the time of pushing order notification and the displayed image will be described (corresponding to when the effect of effect number “3653” in FIG. ). As shown in FIG. 56 (a), when the start lever 32 is operated, the main control board 101 (main control means 100) causes the control command "0x95 ##" (the part where "#" is shown) to indicate the effect group number Is information indicating which of the effect group numbers are and the control command “0x96 ##” (where ## indicates the special part has not been won) indicating the feature winning number (conditional device number) 00 ", when the special role is won," 01 "when BB1 is won," 02 "when BB2 is won, and" 03 "when BB3 is won The sub-control board 300 (rendering control means 301), which has sent these control commands to the sub-control board 300, sends 6 system commands "0x6000" and 4 systems corresponding to the rendering number "3653" as a rendering command. Command To the image control board 400 to "0x4000" in this order. In this case, it is assumed that one command “0x6000” is used to indicate the effect that “the right middle right” is pressed (informing “1 · 2 · 3”), but such information May be divided into a plurality of pieces of information (a plurality of effect commands). For example, the effect command of "0x6000" is notified that the effect of notifying the pressing order is to be executed, and the correct pressing order of notification by the effect is "0x601 #"(# indicates the correct pressing order, for example, FIG. 13 (b) (1 to 9) and notify the color and decoration image of the push order image with the command “0x602 #” (# indicates the color and decoration image), and the background image The presentation pattern such as the display position of the pressing order image may be notified by a command “0x4000”. In this case, the image control board 400 is configured to display the push order image upon reception of the push order command (0x601 #), and is configured not to display the push order image when the command is not received. It is also good. In addition, when the effect command other than pushing order command (0x601 #) can not be received due to communication error, etc., the display content (effect content) on the image display device 41 is determined based on the effect command received in the previous game. It may be configured as follows. When the sub-sub CPU 410 of the image control board 400 receives "0x6000" and "0x4000" as an effect command, it determines that the effect is to notify the order of pushing in the middle left, creates the drawing command list, and sends it to the image control IC 420. The image is transmitted and displayed on the image display device 41 at the time of operation of the start lever. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 57, the background image is developed on the video RAM 430, then the decoration image is developed, and finally the push order image (“1 · 2 · 3”) is developed. So, create a drawing command list. With this configuration, the push order image is displayed in preference to other images. Although FIG. 57 shows the case where the color of the push order image corresponding to the stop button to be operated next is changed and displayed, the present invention is not limited to this display mode (other push order images It is possible to display larger than or blink it). Also in the following description, the display mode and the development order of these images are the same.

  Then, when the reels 21a to 21c start rotating, the main control board 101 transmits a control command "0x9800" indicating start of rotation of the reels 21a to 21c to the sub control board 300, and the sub control board having received this control command. In order to notify the image control board 400 of the start of the rotation of the reels 21a to 21c, 300 transmits "0x0500". Thus, when receiving "0x0500", the image control board 400 outputs the effect at the start of rotation to the image display device 41 (however, as shown in FIG. 47, the effect at the time of star lever operation this time) No new rendition is performed).

  Next, when the left stop button 33a is operated as the first stop, the main control board 101 causes the control command "0x9E ##" (in the part where "#" is shown, to indicate that the stop acceptance of the left reel 21a is received. The sub control board 300 which has transmitted the symbol number at the time of stop acceptance in upper 5 bits and information indicating the number of slips in the lower 3 bits to the sub control board 300 and received this control command is sent to the image control board 400 As the first stop, “0x0501” is sent to the image control board 400 to notify that the left stop button 33 a has been operated. Thereby, when receiving “0x0501”, the image control board 400 outputs, to the image display device 41, the image in which the pressing order of the left stop button 33a and the decoration image have been erased as the effect of the first stop.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 56 (b), when the middle stop button 33b is operated as the second stop, the main control board 101 performs a secondary control of the control command "0x9F ##" indicating the stop acceptance of the middle reel 21b. The sub control board 300 that has transmitted this to the substrate 300 and received this control command transmits to the image control board 400 "0x0512" notifying the image control board 400 that the middle stop button 33b has been operated as the second stop. Do. Thereby, when receiving “0x0512”, the image control board 400 outputs, to the image display device 41, an image in which the pressing order image of the middle stop button 33b and the decoration image have been erased as an effect of the second stop.

  Furthermore, when the right stop button 33c is operated as the third stop, the main control board 101 transmits a control command "0xA0 ##" indicating acceptance of stop of the right reel 21c to the sub control board 300, and this control command is The sub control board 300 that has received the image control board 400 transmits, to the image control board 400, “0x0523” notifying that the right stop button 33c has been operated as the third stop. Thereby, when the image control board 400 receives “0x0523”, an image in which the pressing order image of the right stop button 33 c and the decoration image have been erased as an effect of the third stop (all pressing order images and decoration images Image is output to the image display device 41.

  Finally, when all the reels 21a to 21c have stopped, the main control board 101 receives a control command "0xA5 ##" (in which "#" is shown indicates the number of obtained sheets) indicating that all the reels have stopped. The sub control board 300 transmits information (which is information) to the sub control board 300, and the sub control board 300 receiving this control command notifies the image control board 400 that "all the reels 21a to 21c have stopped". Transmit to substrate 400. As a result, when the image control board 400 receives "0x0504", as an effect at the time of all the stops, an image (Success shown in FIG. 53 (e) showing that it was operated in correct order). Image). Also at this time, the image of “Succeeded !!” is finally developed in the video RAM 430 and displayed in priority to the background image. This image display of "success!" Is an example, and for example, an image for a winning combination may be displayed when all reels are stopped.

-When operated in the wrong order-
Next, the case where the stop buttons 33a to 33c are operated in the incorrect push order in the effect of the effect number "3653" will be described using Figs. 58 and 59. When the stop button is operated in the order of pressing the correct answer, since it has already been described, the detailed description will be omitted. Here, the case where "middle left and right" is operated with respect to the correct pressing order of "left middle right", that is, the case where the incorrect pressing order is operated at the first stop will be described. As shown in FIG. 58, when the start lever 32 is operated and when the rotation of the reels 21a to 21c starts, control commands indicating each are transmitted from the main control board 101 to the sub control board 300, and these are shown. The sub-control board 300 transmits an effect command to the image control board 400 according to the control command.

  Then, when the middle stop button 33b is operated as a first stop, the main control board 101 transmits a control command "0x9F ##" indicating acceptance of stop of the middle reel 21b to the sub control board 300, and this control command is The sub control board 300 that has received the image control board 400 transmits, to the image control board 400, "0x0511" notifying that the middle stop button 33b has been operated as the first stop. Further, since the sub control board 300 is operated in the incorrect pressing order, the sub control board 300 transmits, to the image control board 400, a rendering command (in this case, “0x60FF”) indicating that the notification of the pressing order is canceled. Note that the transmission order of “0x0502” indicating the operated stop button and “0x60FF” indicating cancellation of notification of the pressing order may be reversed. Thereby, when the image control board 400 receives “0x60FF”, as shown in FIG. 59, an image showing cancellation of notification of pressing order (not operated in correct pressing order) (FIG. 53 (e The image of "Failure !!" shown in) is displayed. At this time, it is desirable that the image of “Failure !!” is developed on the video RAM 430 later than the decoration image and the push order image. As a result, it is possible to display on the image display device 41 that the notification of the pressing order has been canceled is given priority over other images. As shown in FIG. 58 and FIG. 59, when the stop buttons 33a to 33c are operated in the incorrect push order, the mode of the effect in the correct push order when the stop buttons 33a to 33c are operated in the push order different from the correct push order. (The pattern of the effect shown in FIG. 56 and FIG. 57) is configured to be in an aspect (pattern) different from that. The image control board 400 is configured to delete the effect pattern set by “0x6000” and “0x4000” when “0x60FF” is received. As a result, after the image of “Failure !!” is displayed in FIG. 58 and FIG. 59 and it is displayed that the notification of the pressing order is canceled, the same image is displayed in the present embodiment (effect is changed Not configured) (The display of the push order image is not deleted, and the image of “Failure !!” is displayed thereon). However, it may be configured not to display (delete) the push order image or the like. Further, in the present embodiment, the sub control board 300 determines that the correct pressing order is not operated by the sub control board 300, and transmits a rendering command (“0x60FF”) indicating that the notification of the pressing order is canceled to the image control board 400. Although it is shown about the case where it is constituted, it is clear that the correct pushing order is "left middle right" by the effect command "0x6000" transmitted when the start lever 32 is operated, and the first Since the stop button operated in the second and third stops can be found by the commands “0x05 # 1”, “0x05 # 2”, and “0x05 # 3”, it is judged and displayed in the process of the image control board 400 It may be configured to determine an image.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the winning order bell or the pressing order replay is won, and the pressing order affects the state of the game, the main control means 100 side also It is configured to notify the pressing order (displayed on the acquired number display 72). When the stop buttons 33a to 33c are not operated in the correct pressing order, the display of the pressing order on the main control means 100 continues but the display on the sub control means 200 is erased (or as described above) An image such as “Failure !!” may be displayed, or the display of the pressing order on the main control unit 100 may be deleted.

-Modification of push order display-
In the above description, the information (instruction content) related to the pressing order displayed on the image display device 41 is determined by the information (instruction content and effect group number) according to the result of the lottery, but the additional information is also considered It is also possible to configure it to make a decision. For example, when it is determined to notify the additional information when it is configured to perform the additional lottery for the winning of the above-mentioned re-playing role-D1 to D3, the sub CPU 310 of the sub control board 300 performs the role lottery Order that can display the combination of the specific symbol corresponding to the result of (the order of the symbols of symbol combination of replay role 05 being stopped and displayed on the effective line with respect to winning of replay role-D1 to D3) , And information to be output based on the set pressing order can be transmitted to the image control board 400 by the rendering command. In addition, when it is determined not to notify the additional information, the pressing order capable of displaying the combination of the specific symbols is not set (a non-displayable pressing order, for example, a combination of symbols of replay part 01 in the example described above) May be set to stop on the effective line).

-When an error occurs-
60 and 61 show the case where the front door 3 is opened and closed before the first stop operation is performed after the reels 21a to 21c start to rotate. When the main control board 101 detects that the front door 3 is opened, the main control board 101 transmits the error information as a control command "0xABCD" to the sub control board 300, and the sub control board 300 which receives this control command is an image display device. The image control board 400 transmits an effect command “0x012B” for displaying an error image “the door is open” at 41 to the image control board 400, and the image control board 400 having received this effect command displays an error image (FIG. 55 (f)). Is displayed on the image display device 41. Since the display of such an error image is always displayed with priority over other images, the sub-sub-loop processing S800 of the image control board 400 is such that the display of the error image has the highest priority. The drawing command list is configured to be generated (that is, to be placed behind commands of other images in the drawing command list). When the pressing order described above is notified (the pressing order image and the decoration image are displayed), the error image is prioritized over these images (a command for drawing the error image in the drawing command list) Are arranged behind the push order image). Therefore, when the error image is displayed, in order to also display the pressing order image (to allow the player to recognize), as shown in FIG. 61, different positions on the screen of the image display device 41 (at least It is necessary to configure each image to be displayed at a position where the whole does not overlap. Then, as shown in FIG. 60, when the main control board 101 detects that the front door 3 is closed, it transmits a control command "0xABXY" indicating that the error is released to the sub control board 300. When the sub control board 300 receives this control command, the image control board 400 clears the above-mentioned error display by transmitting the effect command “0x01A0” for deleting the display of the error image to the image control board 400. (The subsequent processing is as described above.)

  Here, the time when the front door 3 is opened and closed has been described, for example, although the pushing order bell is won and the correct pushing order is displayed on the image display device 41 by the sub control means 200, a predetermined time (for example, If the stop buttons 33a to 33c are not operated even after 30 seconds have passed, a message such as "Please operate the stop button" is displayed as an error image prompting the player to operate the stop button by the method described above. It may be configured. Also at this time, such an image needs to be displayed with priority, so it is arranged behind the command for drawing another image (for example, a push order image) in the drawing command list. It will be. At that time, it is desirable to display an error image prompting the operation at a position where the push sequence image can be identified. The determination for displaying an image prompting the user without operation of the stop buttons 33a to 33c is determined by the processing on the side of the sub control substrate 300, and a rendering command for displaying this image is transmitted to the image control substrate 400. It may be configured to be determined, or may be determined and displayed by the processing on the image control board 400 side. In addition, the main control means 100 also displays such an image (when the front door or the like is opened and closed and an error occurs, or when the stop button is not operated even after a predetermined time has elapsed), It is desirable that notification of the push order on the side be continued.

-Display prompting for stop operation (display of operation promotion image)-
In the slot machine 1 according to this embodiment, after the start lever 32 is operated and the rotation of the reels 21a to 21c is started, the rotation of the reels for which the corresponding stop button 33 is not operated is continued. Therefore, the time from when the reels 21a to 21c start rotating is measured, and even if any stop button 33 is not operated even after a predetermined time (for example, one minute) has elapsed, the operation of the stop button 33 is performed. Is displayed to prompt you. Specifically, the display "Please operate the stop button" is displayed on the image display device 41.

  As shown in FIG. 63, after start lever 32 is operated and reels 21a to 21c start to rotate, sub CPU 310 of sub control board 300 if stop buttons 33a to 33 c are not operated even if a predetermined time passes. (Specifically, even if a predetermined time has passed since the control command “0x9800” indicating that the rotation of the reels 21a to 21c has been started from the main control board 101, the stop acceptance of the left reel 21a is received. A control command "0x9E ##" indicating that the left stop button 33a has been operated, a control command "0x9F ##" indicating that the middle reel 21b is stopped (the middle stop button 33b has been operated), a right reel 21c any of the control commands “0xA0 ##” indicating that the stop has been received (the right stop button 33c has been operated) (If it is determined that there is not), a rendering command “for displaying on the image control board 400 a message“ Please perform operation of the stop button ”(hereinafter referred to as“ operation prompting image ”) on the image display device 41 Send "0x0210". Then, when receiving the effect command for displaying the operation promotion image, the image control board 400 causes the image display device 41 to display the operation promotion image, as shown in FIG. The sub CPU 310 of the sub control means 300 receives the control command “0x96 ##” indicating the winning item winning number (condition device number) from the main control board 101, and the left reel 21a even if a predetermined time has elapsed. A control command "0x9E ##" indicating acceptance of stop, a control command "0x9F ##" indicating acceptance of stop of the middle reel 21b, and a control command "0x0A ##" indicating acceptance of stop of the right reel 21c are being received. If it is not determined, the rendering command “0x0210” may be transmitted to the image control board 400. Further, the sub CPU 310 of the sub control means 300 controls the control command "0x9E ##" indicating acceptance of stop of the left reel 21a even if a predetermined time has elapsed after the rotation speed of the reel 21 becomes constant speed, and the middle reel 21b. If it is determined that neither the control command “0x9F ##” indicating acceptance of stop nor the control command “0x0A ##” indicating acceptance of stop of the right reel 21 c is received, the image control board 400 sends an effect command “ "0x0210" may be transmitted.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 64, the operation promotion image is configured to be displayed with priority over the push order image (that is, in the drawing command list, the command for drawing the operation promotion image is , Is placed behind the command to draw the order image)). Further, the operation prompting image is largely displayed on the image display device 41 at a position overlapping with a part or all of the pressing order image. As described above, the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment only displays the pressing order on the image display device 41 by the sub control unit 200 when notifying the pressing order (operation order) of the stop buttons 33a to 33c. Instead, the main control unit 100 is configured to display information on the pressing order on the number-of-acquisitions display 72. Further, the notification of the pressing order (display of information regarding the pressing order) by the acquired number display 72 is performed until all the reels 21a to 21c stop (even after all the stops, the hand operated from the stop button 33 operated last) When is not released, it is configured to continue until the hand is released). Therefore, by displaying the operation promotion image on the image display device 41, even if the push order image displayed on the image display device 41 is difficult to see or disappears (the operation promotion image is displayed superimposed on the push order image As a result, even if the push order image becomes invisible or invisible), the main control unit 100 displays information on the push order on the number-of-acquisitions display 72, which is disadvantageous to the player. There is nothing to do. As described above, by displaying the operation promotion image in a large size without considering that the push order image is displayed (by displaying a large image even if at least a part of the push order image is overlapped), The effect of displaying the operation promotion image can be sufficiently exhibited. Among the conventional slot machines, in the sub AT machine (slot machine configured to control the AT by the sub control means), during AT game, the navigation display (pushing order) is performed on the image display device driven (controlled) by the sub control means. Although the display of the image was displayed, the navigation display (the display of the information regarding the pressing order) was not displayed on the display (for example, the acquired number display) driven (controlled) by the main control means. Also, in the main AT machine (slot machine configured to control the AT by the main control means), the navigation display is displayed also on the display (acquired number display) driven by the main control means, but the sub control means It was more difficult to grasp the corresponding pressing order than the navigation display displayed on the driven image display device. Therefore, in general, a display (display of an operation promotion image) prompting the user to stop the rotation of the reel on the image display device during AT game has not been displayed. In addition, even if the operation promotion image is displayed during AT game, it is displayed so as not to overlap with the pressing order image. In other words, the navigation display displayed on the image display device is prevented from being obscured (not to be disadvantageous to the player). Specifically, when the operation promotion image is displayed on the image display device during AT game, it is displayed in the corner of the image display device, and if the navigation display is displayed in a large size (displayed so as to stand out If it was), it was displayed small (it was displayed inconspicuously). In short, in the conventional slot machine, there is a problem that the expected (displaying the operation promoting image) effect can not be exhibited even when the operation promoting image is displayed on the image display device. For example, if the start lever is touched by mistake when going to the bathroom, the operation promotion image is displayed by the time it returns from the bathroom, but it is displayed small because it is displayed small in the corner of the image display device. I could not confirm from a distance. In other words, I could not realize that I had to hurry back to my seat. In the information on the order of pressing displayed on the number-of-acquisitions display 72, as described above, for example, the lower digit of the number-of-acquisitions display 72 displays a number indicating the order of operating the stop buttons 33a to 33c. (See Figure 13). In addition to the display of "Please operate the stop button" described above, the operation prompting image also says, for example, "... more than a minute, during reel rotation", or "Stop the reel". It can be displayed.

  Referring back to FIG. 63, when any one of the stop buttons 33a to 33c is operated (for example, control indicating that the left stop button 33a is operated from the main control board 101) while the operation prompting image is displayed. When the command “0x9E ##” is received), the secondary control board 300 transmits, to the image control board 400, a rendering command “0x02B0” for erasing (not displaying) the operation promotion image, and further, As the first stop, an effect command “0x0501” is sent to notify that the left stop button 33a has been operated. When receiving the effect command “0x02B0” for deleting the operation promotion image, the image control board 400 deletes the operation promotion image as shown in FIG. 64 (returns to the display state before the operation promotion image is displayed) And the effect command “0x0501” for notifying that the left stop button 33 a has been operated as the first stop, the effect described above is executed. In addition, after transmitting the rendering command “0x0501”, the sub control board 300 may transmit the rendering command “0x02B0”. In addition, a predetermined time has elapsed since the first stop operation (in which two of the three reels are rotating) or after the second stop operation (in which one of the three reels is in rotation) Even when the stop button 33 is not operated, the operation promoting image is displayed again. Alternatively, when the operation promotion image is displayed, the operation promotion image is continuously displayed until all the stop buttons 33 are operated, and after the third stop operation (the rotation of all the reels 21 is stopped) The effect control image “0x02B0” for deleting the operation promotion image from the sub control substrate 300 to the image control substrate 400 may be transmitted to delete the operation promotion image.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 65 and 66, when the sub control substrate 300 displays the operation promotion image on the image display device 41, an effect of displaying the operation promotion image at a predetermined time interval (for example, 1 second) By alternately transmitting to the image control board 400 the command “0x0210” and the effect command “0x02B0” for erasing the operation promotion image, the image display device 41 is configured to repeat display / erase of the operation promotion image. It is also good. In addition, two seconds after transmitting the effect command “0x0210” for displaying the operation promoting image, the effect command “0x02B0” for deleting the operation promoting image is transmitted, and one second after that, the effect command “0x0210” is transmitted You may configure it. As described above, it is possible to make it easy for the player to recognize that the operation promotion image is displayed when the operation promotion image is repeatedly displayed and deleted (in the image display device 41, the operation promotion image is displayed in a blinking manner). (The player's consciousness can be directed to the operation prompting image), and when the push order image is displayed, the player can give an opportunity to confirm the display contents, and the player is not There is no gain. Specifically, even if it is difficult to immediately grasp the corresponding pressing order from the information on the pressing order displayed on the acquired number display 72, the pressed order image (navigation display) displayed on the image display device 41 Since the timing when it can see can come regularly, it does not become a disadvantage of the player. Although FIG. 64 is described as a configuration in which display / erase of the operation promotion image is controlled by a rendering command transmitted from sub-control board 300 to image control board 400, as shown in FIG. 63, the sub-control board 300 transmits the rendering command “0x0210” at the timing of displaying the operation promoting image, and the image control board 400 that receives this rendering command displays and erases the operation promoting image at a predetermined time interval (for example, 1 second) Control may be performed.

  Further, the position at which the pressing order image is displayed in the display area of the image display device 41 may be configured to be changeable according to the situation. Specifically, display may be performed at the first position, the second position, and the third position in the display area of the image display device 41. For example, the first position is a position where the operation promotion image and a part of the push order image overlap, and the second position is a part of the operation promotion image and the push order image (a range overlapping with the first position The third position is a position where the operation promotion image and the push order image do not overlap. When the character display of the character is not displayed on the image display device 41, the push order image is displayed at the first position or the third position. However, when the character display of the character is displayed on the image display device 41, The push order image may be displayed at the second position. When the image control board 400 receives the effect command for displaying the operation promotion image from the sub control board 300 while the pressing order image is displayed at the first position or the second position, the pressing order image is displayed. By moving to the third position and displaying the operation promotion image, it is possible to make the player recognize both the push order image and the operation promotion image.

  Further, in the above description, the operation promotion image is configured to be displayed with priority over the push order image, but the push order image may be displayed to be prioritized over the operation promotion image. . However, it is preferable that the pushing order image not overlap the operation promoting image as much as possible.

  Moreover, it is preferable to display the display of the operation promotion image in the image display device 41 at the same position and the same size regardless of whether or not the push order image is displayed. By not changing the display position or the like of the operation promotion image according to the situation, the processing load on the sub control board 300 and the image control board 400 can be reduced. In addition, since it is not necessary to prepare operation promotion images of different sizes, the amount of data storage can be reduced. Furthermore, regardless of whether AT game is in progress or not, the operation promotion image can be displayed in a noticeable position at the image display device 41 in a noticeable position, so that the effect of displaying the operation promotion image can be sufficiently exhibited. .

-Relationship between display of operation prompt image and display of error image-
In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the main control means 100 stops the progress of the game when the front door 3 is opened (for example, effective operation even if the start lever 32, the stop buttons 33a to 33c, etc. are operated) And the game is resumed when the front door 3 is closed. With such a configuration, when the front door 3 is open, the start lever 32 and the stop button 33 may contact the facilities of the game arcade (for example, a game medal lending device, etc.) or the player. Even if the game does not proceed (the rotation of the reels 21a to 21c does not start or stop), the player is not disadvantaged.

  Further, as described with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61, the image display device 41 is configured to display / delete the error image in accordance with the opening / closing of the front door 3. At this time, when the above-described operation prompting image is displayed, the operation prompting image is also erased (not displayed) together with the error image. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 67 (a) and 68, when the front door 3 is opened while the operation prompting image is displayed, the main control board 101 causes the sub control board 300 to move forward. The control command "0xABCD" indicating that the door 3 is opened is transmitted, and the sub control board 300 which receives this control command causes the image control unit 400 to display an error image "0x012B". Send The error image is configured to be displayed on the image display device 41 prior to other images. Therefore, the error image is prioritized over the operation promotion image, and is displayed on the operation promotion image. Then, when the front door 3 is closed, a control command "0xABXY" indicating that the front door 3 is closed is transmitted from the main control board 101 to the sub control board 300, and the sub control having received this control command The substrate 300 transmits an effect command “0x01A0” for erasing the error image and an effect command “0x02B0” for erasing the operation promoting image to the image control substrate 400, whereby the image control substrate 400 performs an error image and an operation. The promotion image is erased, and the image display device 41 returns to the display state before the error image and the operation promotion image are displayed. That is, when the pressing order image is displayed, the image is displayed. In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, for example, even if the harness connecting the stop buttons 33a to 33c and the main control board 101 is pulled out for some reason, the operation information on the stop buttons 33a to 33c is the main control board Since the image is not input to 101, the operation prompting image is displayed on the image display device 41 when the predetermined time passes. However, the reason why the push order image displayed on the image display device 41 is not visible in the operation promotion image until such a player is not responsible is considered to be harsh to the player. Therefore, when the front door 3 is opened, the cause of inability to operate the stop buttons 33a to 33c is removed, and the front door 3 is closed, the player erases (hides) the operation promotion image together with the error image. Can not be disadvantaged.

  As shown in FIGS. 67 (b) and 69, when the front door 3 is opened and the control command "0xABCD" is transmitted from the main control substrate 101, the sub control substrate 300 is transmitted to the image control substrate 400. The effect commands “0x02B0” and “0x012B” are sent to erase the operation prompting image, and an error image is displayed, and when the front door 3 is closed, the effect command “0x01A0” is sent to the image control board 400 and an error occurs. It may be configured to erase the image. Also in this case, the error image is displayed in preference to the other images (pushed images).

  Further, the main control unit 100 switches the information on the pushing order displayed on the obtained number display 72 to a display notifying that the front door 3 is opened when the front door 3 is opened (in other words, Then, when the front door 3 is closed, the display of the information on the order of pressing is resumed on the acquired number display 72 when the display of the information on the order of pressing is interrupted. In order to stop the progress of the game when the front door 3 is opened, even if the display of the information on the pushing order is interrupted, the player is not disadvantageously given. Rather, since the display is switched to a display informing that the front door 3 is opened, it can be definitely notified that the progress of the game is stopped, and the player can feel a sense of security.

  In addition, when the front door 3 is opened, the main control means 100 stops the progress of the game, and after the front door 3 is closed, the key for opening the front door 3 is turned counterclockwise (when turned clockwise) The front door 3 may be opened) and may be configured to resume the progress of the game (in this case, the above-described error image is erased when the key is turned counterclockwise). With such a configuration, when the front door 3 is open, the start lever 32 and the stop buttons 33a to 33c contact facilities of the game arcade (for example, a game medal lending device etc.) or contact the player. If the player does not advance the game (the reels 21a to 21c do not start or stop rotating), the player is not disadvantaged. Further, the timing of erasing the operation promoting image may be when erasing the error image or may be when displaying the error image. Also in these cases, the error image is displayed in preference to other images (pushed images, etc.).

  In the above description, the operation promotion image is erased when the front door 3 is opened or closed while the operation promotion image is displayed. However, when the front door 3 is opened or closed, an error image is displayed Although deletion is performed, the display of the operation promotion image may be configured to continue regardless of the opening and closing of the front door 3 (as described above, also in this case, any one of the stop buttons 33a to 33c is operated) Or, if all the reels 21a to 21c stop, the operation promoting image is erased). In this case, although the push order image is in a state in which it is difficult or impossible to be seen by the operation promotion image, as described above, in the state in which the front door 3 is closed (state in which the progression of the game is resumed), Since the main control unit 100 displays the information on the order of pressing on the number-of-acquisitions display 72, the player is not disadvantaged. By the way, after the front door 3 is closed, the display of the operation promotion image is continued even in the case where the progress of the game is resumed by turning the key for opening the front door 3 counterclockwise. You may

  In the above description, although the case where the progress of the game is stopped when the front door 3 is opened has been described, even when the front door 3 is opened, the progress of the game is not stopped Good. In this case, it is preferable that the sub control unit 200 (sub control board 300) detect that the front door 3 is opened, and display the above-described error image. Further, in this case, it is preferable that the display of the information on the pushing order by the main control unit 100 on the acquired number display 72 is continuously displayed even if the front door 3 is opened. By configuring the secondary control unit 200 to detect that the front door 3 is opened, the processing load on the main control unit 100 can be reduced. Further, since the display of the information regarding the pressing order on the obtained number display 72 by the main control means 100 continues, it does not become a disadvantage for the player even if the pressing order image of the image display device 41 is not visible due to the error image. . Specifically, when the front door 3 is opened while the reels 21 are rotating, the number of winnings is made before the stop button 33 contacts equipment of a game arcade (for example, a game medal lending device etc.) If the stop button 33 is operated in accordance with the display of the information on the pressing order on the display 72, the player will not be disadvantaged.

  In addition, the error image may be configured not only to display “error” as described above, but also to directly display the cause, such as “front door is open” or “front door open”. Good.

(About correspondence at the time of power supply return)
As described above, at the time of power recovery, processing of clearing and recovery of the memory is performed, but when the push order bell or push order replay is won and the push order is notified by the main control means 100, the power off state In the slot machine in which the winning combination is held when the power is restored, it is preferable that the notification of the pushing order by the main control means 100 be restored (announcing the pushing order) in the slot machine. On the other hand, since the secondary control means 200 side requires complicated processing to restore the display contents of the image display device 41, the notification of the pressing order may not be displayed. As described above, even if the sub control means 200 side does not notify the pressing order, the main control means 100 notifies the pressing order, so that the player is not disadvantaged. Of course, the sub control means 200 may also be configured to restore the notification of the pressing order. At this time, means other than the image display device 41 (for example, a second notification means such as a lamp or a speaker) for notifying the pressing order is also provided on the sub control means 200 side, and the image is displayed when the power is restored. The notification of the pressing order by the device 41 is not restored, but the notification by light emission or sound by the second notification means of a lamp, a speaker or the like (for example, the effect lamp 42) may be restored. The notification by the second notification means may be configured to be notified together with the notification by the image display device 41 even in a normal game. Here, the “power-off state” does not indicate that a voltage drop is detected, but indicates a state in which no voltage is supplied. In addition, notification of the order of pressing by the main control means 100 (display of information regarding the order of pressing by the acquired number display 72) and notification of the order of pressing by the sub control means 200 (display of the order of pressing images by the image display device 41, operation) Under the condition that the lamp is lit to teach the stop button, when the power off state occurs, when the power is restored, it is restored to the state just before the power off state occurs (all the notification are restored) ) May be configured.

(About the execution timing of drawing processing in sub sub loop processing)
In the above-described sub-sub-loop processing S800, the sub-sub-CPU 410 transmits the drawing command list (the drawing command list generated based on the rendering command transmitted from the sub control board 300) generated in the previous loop processing to the image control IC 420. In addition, while drawing processing is performed based on the drawing command list by the image control IC 420, the case has been described in which the next drawing command list is created in parallel. As described above, the sub-sub-CPU 410 and the image control IC 420 operate in parallel by configuring the sub-sub-CPU 410 to create the drawing command list in parallel with the drawing processing by the image control IC 420, thereby improving processing efficiency. . Then, when the processing efficiency is improved in this way, the image is displayed as the effect according to the effect command, so the drawing process can not correspond to the process of the received effect command, and some images can not be drawn (frame Can be made difficult to occur. However, the analysis of the rendering command and the creation of the drawing command list, and the drawing by the drawing command list straddle two loops in the sub-sub loop process S800 (the drawing by the drawing command list generated in the previous loop process is Since the actual drawing will be started when the swap is performed after the drawing process is executed, and so on, the sub sub A delay occurs for the time of two loop processes of loop process S800.

  Therefore, as in the sub-sub-loop process S 800 ′ shown in FIG. 62, analysis of a rendering command and creation of a drawing command list may be made, and drawing by this drawing command list may be configured to be executed in one loop process. . In FIG. 62, the sub-sub CPU 410 first executes the command analysis processing S8000 described above (step S801 '), and generates a drawing command based on the analysis result by the drawing command list generation processing S8020 (step S802'). A drawing start command is sent to the control IC 420 together with the drawing command list (step S 803 ′). In the sub-sub-loop processing S800 ′, when the sub-sub CPU 410 transmits a drawing start instruction, the sub-sub CPU 410 is configured to wait for processing execution until a drawing end signal is transmitted from the image control IC 420 (step S804 ′). ). When the image control IC 420 receives the drawing start command, the image control IC 420 executes the drawing processing S8030 as described above, and transmits a signal to the effect that drawing is ended to the sub sub CPU 410 when drawing is ended. If it is determined in step S 804 ′ that the drawing is completed, the sub-sub CPU 410 executes the above-described sound periodic process (step S 805 ′), and detects the V blank interrupt from the display circuit 450 to further The process waits until the first write position is reached (step S806 '). When the sub-sub CPU 410 detects the V blank interrupt twice, it transmits the above-mentioned runaway monitoring signal to the sub control board 300 (step S 807 ′), and executes frame buffer swapping (step S 808 ′). By executing this swap, as described above, the image output to the image display device 41 is executed from the frame buffer (one of the frame buffer 0 or 1) drawn by the image control IC 420 according to the instruction in step S803 '. Also, the next drawing is performed in the frame buffer (the other of frame buffer 0 or 1) on which the previous output was performed in step S 803 ′ to be executed next (drawing using the drawing command list created in step S 802 ′ described above) Will be done.

  According to such sub-sub-loop processing S800 ', analysis of the rendering command transmitted from the sub control board 300 and creation of the drawing command list and drawing by the drawing command list can be executed in a single loop, so image display Since the display by the device 41 is performed at the start of the next loop, the time from the reception of the rendering command to the drawing is performed can be performed with a delay of the time of one loop processing of the sub-sub loop processing S800. However, in this case, since the sub-sub CPU 410 and the image control IC 420 wait for the end of each other's processing, it is not possible to fully exert their processing capabilities. In addition, when a large number of effect commands are transmitted, analysis of effect commands, creation of a drawing command list, and drawing by this drawing command list can not be completed within a predetermined time, and display of an image on the image display device 41 It is likely that processing delays such as delays or partial display of frames may not occur.

(About push sequence game)
In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the "push on hit game" is given a certain benefit when the player succeeds in applying the correct push on when the player wins a predetermined part. I say a game. Such benefits may be considered to be those with an impact on the balls and those without any effects on the balls. Here, “a privilege that affects the payout” is a privilege given by the main control means 100, and may be considered to be the addition of the number of AT games or the addition of stock of AT. In addition, “a bonus that does not affect the payout” is a bonus given by the sub control unit 200, and it can be considered that a premium effect, a title, etc. (a so-called “maithlo” function whose setting can be changed by the player) can be given. . For example, as shown in FIG. 9A, in the winning combinations-B1 to B6 in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the stop buttons operated at the first stop are assigned in the correct press order (second stop And the third stop may be in any order). For example, the winning combination-B1 may be operated in the order of "left middle right" or in the order of "left right middle". Therefore, consider the case where the winning combination-B1 to B6 is pressed and used in the hit game. For example, when the winning combination-B1 in which the first stop in the correct pressing order is the left stop button 33a is won, first, in the internal gaming state setting process S5120, "left middle right" and "left right middle" One of them is decided as the correct answer pressing order (when “right middle right” is the correct pressing order, “A1” is set as the instruction number, and when “right and left middle” is the correct pressing order, "A2" is set as the instruction number). Then, it is determined by lottery whether or not the push sequence game is to be executed, and when it is determined to execute the push sequence game, the instruction number is rewritten to “A7” (the instruction content at this time is (1 ··· ))). The same applies to the case of winning the winning combination-B2. In addition, when winning a winning combination-B3 and B4 and executing the push-to-place hit game, the instruction number is rewritten to "A8" (the instruction content becomes (? · 1 ·?)), The winning combination-B5 , B6 and execute the push-to-place hit game, the instruction number is rewritten to “A9” (the contents of the instruction are “···· 1)).

  When it is desired to play the pushing order hit game in the condition device number that affects the balls by pushing order, the main control unit 100 needs to determine whether or not to execute the pushing order hit game (lottery) is there. In addition, when such a pressing order placement game is performed, the main control means 100 is configured to transmit a pressing order placement number (A7 to A9) to the sub control means 200, The sub control means 200 can not determine which push order is the correct push order (other effect group numbers are transmitted, but with effect group numbers, it is also determined which condition device number has been won Can not)). Therefore, the sub-control means 200 has stopped on the effective line based on the reception of the control command of the third stop acceptance (the symbol at the time of stop acceptance and the control command including the number of sliding symbols) from the main control means 100. If it is determined that the combination is correct and it is determined that the pressing order is correct, an image may be displayed that suggests giving a benefit. The determination is performed based on the control command of the third stop acceptance because the determination timing is based on the reception of the control command of the number of payouts, and the timing of displaying the image is delayed. In main control means 100, the instruction number (A1 to A6) corresponding to the condition device number is determined before the instruction number (A7 to A9) for pressing order assignment is determined, so the instruction number It is determined whether or not the pushing order indicated by and the pushing order operated by the player coincide with each other, and when they coincide with each other, a privilege is provided (in the case where the supplementary control means 200 provides a privilege, the main The control means 100 does not have to determine whether or not the pushing order matches.

  In addition, when performing the push-to-place hit game, when “A7” to “A9” are set as the instruction numbers, these instruction numbers are prioritized and “A1” to “A6” are displayed, or the register is displayed. I do not remember in

(About intruding measures (display of alerting image))
In the gaming machine, as a conventional countermeasure against depression (a measure for reducing the number of players who play a game beyond their own ability), the game is on standby (without betting of game medals for a long time). Not being done). However, most of the players who are watching the demo screen are not the players who are really obsessed, but are the players who are about to start playing games, so they are able to exhibit the effects expected as a countermeasure for the troubles. In addition, the number of players who played games beyond their own ability was not reduced.

The entanglement is considered to occur as a result of the player being unable to make a calm decision. The following timings may be mentioned as timings at which it is highly likely that a calm judgment can not be made.
(1) Timing at Which AT Game Ends Since many game medals are awarded during AT game, it can be said that there is a high possibility that the player's mind will become large and a calm judgment can not be made. In addition, it can be said that there is a high probability that the AT game is likely to be hidden (it is not won in the AT lottery) and the cool judgment can not be made. Further, at the end of the AT game, the total number of game medals and the like given during the AT game is displayed on the image display device. At that time, if the number of gaming medals awarded during AT game is smaller than the number of gaming medals corresponding to the amount used so far, it is easy to fall into a feeling that it is likely to be recouped. It can be said that there is a high possibility of not being able to make
(2) Timing when the bonus game ends
Since many gaming medals are awarded during the bonus game, it can be said that there is a high possibility that the player's mind will become large and a calm judgment can not be made. In addition, if the number of times the bonus combination is won is large, it is likely to have an expectation that the setting is high (for example, the set value is 5 or more), and it is highly possible that a calm judgment can not be made. Furthermore, at the end of the bonus game, the total number of game medals and the like given during the bonus game is displayed on the image display device. At that time, if the number of game medals awarded during the bonus game is smaller than the number of game medals corresponding to the amount used so far, it is easy to fall into a feeling of being likely to get back It can be said that there is a high possibility of not being able to make

  Therefore, in another embodiment, the alerting is performed at the timing when the special game where many game medals such as the AT game and the bonus game can be awarded is ended.

  FIG. 70 shows an example of an end screen displayed on the image display device 41 at the end of the special game and an image for calling attention (hereinafter, referred to as “alert calling image”). The end screen is an image showing at least the total number of game medals (TOTAL XXX) given during the special game and the background. In addition, an image indicating the total number (TOTAL XXX pieces) of game medals awarded during the special game may be prepared as an image separate from the image indicating the background (hereinafter, referred to as “background image”). In addition, the alert image is an image in which "Let's be careful to get stuck. Pachislot is a play that is enjoyed moderately."

  Next, with reference to FIG. 71, the size of the alert image displayed on the image display device 41 at the end of the special game will be described. If the warning image is too small, the player can not recognize it, and can not exert the effect expected as an anti-glare measure. On the other hand, if it is too large, it may interfere with viewing of other images. In other words, the player may feel uncomfortable. Therefore, in another embodiment, if the image display device displaying the alerting image is less than 7 inches (in other words, if it is a small image display device), the size of the alerting image is 10,00 mm in height , The side is 64,12 mm. In addition, if the image display device that displays the alerting image is 7 inches or more (in other words, if it is a large image display device), the size of the alerting image is 30, 00 mm long and 192, 37 mm wide And

  Next, with reference to FIG. 72, the timing of displaying the end screen and the alerting image on the image display device 41 will be described. FIG. 72 shows the final game of the special game, and when the game medal is awarded in the final game (when the small combination (winning combination) is won), the image display device 41 is added or paid out as the number of credits. An end screen and a warning image are displayed (FIG. 72 (a)). Further, when the game medal is not awarded in the final game (when the replay combination is won, etc.), the end screen and the alerting image are displayed on the image display device after the rotation of all the reels is stopped (FIG. 72 (b)) ).

  Next, the timing at which the end screen on the image display device 41 is not displayed will be described. One of the reasons for displaying the end screen is to teach the player the total number of game medals awarded during the special game. That is, it can be said that there is no problem even if the end screen is not displayed at a timing when the player seems to have recognized the total number of game medals awarded during the special game. Therefore, in another embodiment, the end screen is not displayed when the start switch is operated.

  In another embodiment, when the start lever 32 is operated, the effect display screen corresponding to the game situation at that time is displayed on the image display device 41. For example, if the game after the end of the bonus game or the AT game is a normal game, and the player has won a cherry combination (winning combination-D) which is one of the small winning combinations (winning combination), it is shown in FIG. It is possible to display an effect screen indicating that the player has won the cherry role as shown. In addition, since the game after the end of the bonus game is an AT preparation game, it has been won by a pushing order bell combination (winning combination-A1 to A6 and winning combination-B1 to B6) which is one of the small roles (winning combination). If it is, as shown in FIG. 73 (b), it is possible to display a push order image (hereinafter also referred to as a "navi picture") indicating in what order the stop switch should be operated and an effect screen during AT preparation game.

  Next, the time to continue displaying the alerting image will be described. If the time for displaying the alerting image is too short, the player can not recognize it and can not exert the effect expected as an anti-glare measure. In addition, even if they can be recognized, they do not care about it and can not exert the effect expected as a countermeasure against depression. On the other hand, if it is too long, it may interfere with viewing other images. In other words, the player may feel uncomfortable. Therefore, in another embodiment, the alerting image is continuously displayed only for a time which can exert the effect expected as the anti-glare measure and does not give the player an unpleasant feeling. The appropriate time for continuing to display the alert image will be described in order.

  First, with reference to FIG. 74, the time spent when the player plays a game in the shortest time will be described. After the start lever 32 is operated, it takes about 180 ms from when rotation of the reel 21 starts to when the rotational speed of the reel 21 becomes constant. In addition, the time it takes from when the stop button 33 is operated to when the rotation of the reel 21 is stopped is at most 190 ms. Specified in (5) (1) (e) of the attached table shown in Furthermore, the time spent for adding the game medals granted as a credit number and the time spent for actually paying out are about 40 ms per card. That is, although the time spent when the player plays the game in the shortest time varies depending on the number of game medals awarded, the stop buttons 33 can not be operated at the same time (stop control can not be performed on the plurality of reels 21 simultaneously) If it is about 750 ms to about 1070 ms (when there are 0 to 8 game medals to be awarded), it is about 370 ms if it is the specification that multiple stop switches can be operated simultaneously (can control multiple reels 21 simultaneously stop) It can be said that it is approximately 690 ms (when the number of game medals awarded is 0 to 8).

  By the way, even if the player plays the game in the shortest time, it is not possible to end one game in less than the minimum game time (the minimum time required for one game is 4100 ms or more). This is the separate table 5 (1) li (i) indicated in Article 6 (Technical standard for model of gaming machine) concerning the qualification of gaming machine and examination of model etc. and interpretation of the technical standard It is defined in the standard. Therefore, in another embodiment, as shown in FIG. 75, the previous game is played in the shortest time, and the rotation of the reel 21 is started even if the start lever 32 is operated, the previous game By setting 4100 ms after the start of the rotation of the reel 21 in, the minimum game time is less than one, and one game is not ended.

  Generally, in the BB game which is one of the bonus games, a small winning combination (a small winning combination that does not need to operate the stop button 33 aiming at a specific symbol (winning combination)) is selected with high probability. Yes (in some cases the specifications will always win). In addition, in the AT game, although it is necessary to operate the stop button 33 in a specific order, the in-order bell combination and the in-order replay role are won, but in which order they should be operated. Furthermore, during the bonus game or AT game, the player is excited. Therefore, at least during the special game, many players are playing in the shortest time.

  As described above, even if the player plays a game in the shortest time, it is not possible to end one game in less than the minimum game time. That is, as shown in FIG. 76, when the final special game is played in the shortest time, even if the start lever 32 is operated immediately, it takes some time to start the rotation of the reels 21. Also, even if the rotation of the reel 21 starts, it takes some time for the rotational speed of the reel 21 to become constant. Since any operation by the player is invalid during these times, even if the alerting image is continuously displayed, the player does not feel discomfort, but even if these times are exceeded, the alerting image is Continuing to display may cause the player to feel uncomfortable. This is because at least the operation of the stop button 33 is effective if these times are exceeded, but the stoppage is due to the overlapping of the suggestion of winning the cherry role as shown in FIG. 73 (a) and the alerting image. The user can not operate the button 33 (because it does not know which role to aim for), or because the alerting image is displayed, the user may feel uneasy that the stop button 33 should not be operated. It is from. Therefore, it is preferable that the time to continue displaying the alerting image does not exceed these times.

  Therefore, in another embodiment, an appropriate time for continuing displaying the alerting image is set to 3000 ms or more and 3210 ms or less. Note that the reason why 3000 ms or more is set is that it is considered that the longer it is, the longer it can be expected to exhibit the effect expected as the anti-glare measure.

  As shown in FIG. 77, it is considered that there are only a few players who spend time playing games during special games. In that case, if the warning image is continuously displayed for 3210 ms, at least the operation of the stop button 33 becomes effective on the way, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable. However, since it is a player who takes time to play a game even during the special game, there is a high possibility that he / she does not think that there is a sense of discomfort than a player who plays a game in the shortest time. By the way, if the game is performed in the shortest time after hiding the alerting image, one game can be ended before the minimum game time elapses. Therefore, although it is possible to end the game once before the minimum game time has passed, the alerting image has been continuously displayed, so once before the minimum game time has elapsed. There are no complaints that you could not finish the game.

  Next, the position where the alerting image is displayed will be described. Basically, it is preferably displayed at a position where the player can easily recognize. One of the positions that the player can easily recognize is a position above the center of the housing. This is because the player's eyes are above the center of the box.

  In another embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the image display device 41 is provided above the center of the housing (front door 3), and as shown in FIG. 70, the alerting image is displayed above the center of the image display device 41. I am trying to do it.

  Of course, if the image display device 41 is provided above the center of the housing, the upper side of the center of the image display device 41, the upper right corner above the center, the upper left corner above the center, the lower side of the center, and the lower side A warning image may be displayed at the right corner or the lower left corner from the center.

  In addition, it is preferable to determine the position at which the alert image is displayed, in consideration of the position at which another image is displayed. For example, it is preferable to display a warning image at a position not overlapping as much as possible with the total number of game medals (TOTAL XXX pieces) awarded during the special game and the suggestion of winning the cherry role. In addition, it is preferable to display a reminder image at a position where the images do not overlap as much as possible.

  Furthermore, in another embodiment, the alerting is performed even during the game standby. FIG. 78 shows a demo screen displayed on the image display device 41 while the game is on standby.

  When in the game standby mode, an image showing the manufacturer is displayed first (FIG. 78 (a)). Then, after the predetermined time has elapsed, the alert image is displayed (FIG. 78 (b)). Further, after the predetermined time has passed, an image introducing the material of the slot machine is displayed (FIG. 78 (c)). As described above, during the game standby mode, FIGS. 78A to 78C are repeatedly displayed on the image display device.

  As described above, most of the players who are watching the demonstration screen are not the players who are really focused on, but are the players who are about to start playing games. Although it is conceivable to impress a player who is about to start playing a game in advance as a measure against depression, if excessive attention is given, there is a possibility that the game will be reduced. Therefore, in another embodiment, the time for which the image for alerting during the game standby is continuously displayed is shorter than the time for which the image for alerting at the end of the special game is continued to be displayed. In other words, it is less than 3000 ms. Specifically, it is 2000 ms or less. However, it is not limited to this.

  Incidentally, the position and the size at which the alerting image is displayed is the same as the position and the size when displayed at the end of the special game. This is because the burden on the sub control unit may increase if the position to be displayed is changed depending on the situation. In addition, when the size is changed, it is necessary to prepare a plurality of images.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 82, the case where an error occurs in the final game of the special game will be described. In another embodiment, even if an error occurs between the time when the start lever 32 is operated and the rotation of all the reels 21 is stopped, the game is progressed until the rotation of all the reels 21 is stopped. It is supposed not to stop. This is because if the progress of the game is stopped, the player's concentration may be cut off and a mistake may easily occur when the stop button 33 is operated. In addition, measurement of the minimum game time (4100 ms) is performed while the progress of the game is stopped.

  Then, when the rotation of all the reels 21 is stopped (when the progress of the game is stopped), an error image is displayed on the image display device 41. This is because if an error image is displayed when an error occurs, there is a possibility that the player may make a mistake in surprise. Thereafter, when the error is canceled, the progress of the game is resumed (if the game medal is given, the game medal to be given is added or actually paid out as the number of credits) A reminder image is displayed.

  Although a certain amount of time will be spent before the error is released, the warning image is kept displayed for a predetermined time (more than 3000 ms and less than 3210 ms). Of course, since the alerting image will continue to be displayed even after the operation of the stop button 33 has become effective, there is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable, but shortening the time to continue displaying the alerting image This is because there is a slight risk that the effect expected as a countermeasure against depression will not be exhibited. In addition, since it takes a certain amount of time before the error is cleared, it may not feel uncomfortable if the alerting image continues to be displayed even after the operation of the stop button 33 is enabled. It is because the sex is high.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 83, the case where an error occurs in a situation where a warning image is displayed when the special game is over will be described. In another embodiment, when an error occurs before the start lever 32 is operated, the progress of the game is stopped when an error occurs. In addition, measurement of the minimum game time (4100 ms) is performed while the progress of the game is stopped.

  Further, when the progress of the game is stopped, the image display device 41 displays an error image superimposed on the warning image. By the way, since it is necessary to quickly notify the gaming staff that an error has occurred, the error image is set to have a higher priority than the alert image. Thereafter, when the error is canceled, the progress of the game is resumed (if the game medal is given, the game medal to be given is added or actually paid out as the number of credits), and the image display device 41 displays the error image. Hide it.

  A certain amount of time will be spent before the error is cleared, but it will be a predetermined time (over 3000 ms) without including the time for which the error image is displayed (the time spent until the error is cleared). , 3210 ms or less) keeps displaying the alert image. In addition, the time which has been continuously displayed before displaying an error image (an error occurs) is included. Of course, since the alerting image will continue to be displayed even after the operation of the stop button 33 has become effective, there is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable, but shortening the time to continue displaying the alerting image This is because there is a slight risk that the effect expected as a countermeasure against depression will not be exhibited. In addition, since it takes a certain amount of time before the error is cleared, it may not be uncomfortable if the alerting image continues to be displayed even after the stop switch operation is enabled. Is high.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 84, the case where the supply of power is stopped (in the case of a power-off) under the situation where the alerting image is displayed at the end of the special game will be described. In another embodiment, when the supply of power is stopped, the measurement of the minimum game time (4100 ms) is also stopped, and when the supply of power is resumed, the measurement of the minimum game time (4100 ms) is also restarted.

  Also, when the supply of power is stopped, the image display device 41 is also stopped, and when the supply of power is resumed, the image display device 41 is also restarted to display. Note that the warning image is kept displayed for a predetermined time (3000 ms or more and 3210 ms or less), including the time that has been displayed before the power supply is stopped. Thus, as long as the player plays the game in the shortest time, the alerting image is not continuously displayed even after the operation of the stop button 33 is activated, and the player does not feel uncomfortable.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 85, the case where the effect switch (sub operation switch 45) is operated under the situation where the alerting image is displayed at the end of the special game will be described. In another embodiment, when a gaming medal is awarded, the gaming medal is inserted after the gaming medal to be awarded is added or actually paid out as the number of credits, and then the gaming medal is inserted (the bet button 31 is operated and inserted from the insertion slot 51). When the sub operation switch 45 is operated until then, the menu screen is displayed on the image display device 41. Further, when the menu screen is displayed on the image display device 41, items such as password input, QR code (registered trademark) display, and a payout table can be selected. Specifically, each item can be selected by operating the direction key switch (not shown) and the sub operation switch 45.

  Even when the sub operation switch 45 is operated, the warning image is continuously displayed for a predetermined time (3000 ms or more and 3210 ms or less). This is because if the alert screen is not displayed when the menu screen is displayed, there is a possibility that the effect expected as the anti-glare measure can not be exhibited.

  However, the position where the alert image is displayed is a position where the selected item can be known. In other words, as long as the selected item is known, it may be displayed overlappingly. Further, the position at which the alert image is displayed is a position that does not overlap as much as possible with the QR code (registered trademark) displayed when the QR code (registered trademark) display is selected. This is to prevent the player who is about to finish the game from being unable to finish the game immediately by continuing to display the alerting image.

  In the other embodiment, at the end of the special game, the alert screen is displayed on the image display device 41 together with the end screen, but when the number of game medals awarded during the special game is extremely small, At the end of the process, the alert display image may not be displayed on the image display device 41.

  This is because if the number of game medals awarded during the special game is extremely small, the player's mind does not become large and is awarded during the special game than the number of game medals corresponding to the amount of money used so far. Even if the number of game medals is small, it is difficult to fall back on remorse (because it is almost impossible to recoup).

  As an example when the number of game medals awarded during the special game is extremely small, there are less than 300 in the AT game and 50 or less in the bonus game.

  In the other embodiment, at the end of the special game, the alert screen is displayed on the image display device 41 together with the end screen, but the alert screen is not displayed when the end screen is not displayed. Good. For example, when the AT game is performed continuously for 20 times, a moving image is displayed on the image display device 41 during the 20th AT game. Then, even if the bonus combination is won during the 20th AT game, during the bonus game or at the end of the bonus game, the image display device 41 wants to continue displaying the moving image, so the image display device at the end of the bonus game The end screen is not displayed at 41. In such a case, the warning image may not be displayed because it also hinders viewing of the displayed moving image. However, at the end of the 20th AT game, it is preferable to display an end screen on the image display device 41 and display a warning image.

  In the other embodiment, the size of the alerting image is the size shown in FIG. 71, but it may be a size that can exhibit the effect expected as the anti-glare measure, and the alerting size is larger than the size shown in FIG. It may be an image.

  Further, the size of the alerting image displayed at the end of the special game may be changed according to the situation. For example, the size when displaying together with the end screen and the size when displaying together with the effect screen may be different.

  In the other embodiment, when the game medal is awarded, the end screen and the alerting image are displayed on the image display device 41 after addition or payout as the number of credits, but the rotation of all the reels 21 is stopped. It may be displayed on the image display device 41 later, or may be displayed on the image display device 41 when the last stop button 33 is released. When no game medals are given, the end screen and the alerting image are displayed on the image display device 41 after the rotation of all the reels 21 is stopped, but when the last stop button 33 is released, the image is displayed. 41 may be displayed on the display device.

  In the other embodiments, the end screen and the alerting image are displayed on the image display device 41 at the same timing, but the alerting image may be displayed after the end screen is displayed. Furthermore, the warning image may be displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the end screen was displayed.

  In the other embodiments, the end screen is not displayed when the start lever 32 is operated regardless of whether the game medal is awarded in the final game, but the game medal is awarded When the game medal is inserted (when the bet button 31 is operated or inserted from the insertion slot 51), the end screen may be hidden.

  Also, the display may be hidden when a predetermined time has elapsed since the end screen was displayed. This is because not only the end screen but also the alerting image is displayed on the image display device 41, there is a possibility that the player who feels uneasy may not operate the start lever 32.

  In the other embodiments, the image display device 41 is provided above the center of the housing, but the image display device 41 may be provided at the center of the housing. In that case, if a warning image is displayed above the center of the image display device 41, above the center right corner, above the center right corner, above the center left corner, and at the center, it will be displayed at a position close to the height of the player's eyes. . If only one image display device 41 is provided, the player's line of sight gathers there, so the alert image is displayed at the lower center, lower right corner from the center, lower left corner from the center May be

  In addition, the image display device 41 may be provided below the center of the housing due to the design of the housing and the like. Note that if only one image display device 41 is provided, the player's line of sight gathers there, so the upper right of the center, the upper right corner above the center, the upper left corner above the center, the center, lower than the center, from the center A lower right corner and a lower left corner than the center may display a reminder image.

  Further, the position of the alerting image displayed at the end of the special game may be changed according to the situation. For example, the position when displaying with the end screen and the position when displaying with the effect screen may be different positions.

  In the other embodiments, FIG. 78 (a) to FIG. 78 (c) are repeatedly displayed during the game standby, but the order of display may be changed. For example, FIG. 79 (a) to FIG. 79 (c) may be displayed repeatedly. The reason why the player sees the demonstration screen before starting the game is to confirm what the subject matter of the slot machine that is going to start the game is. As in the other embodiments, when an image for calling attention is displayed before an image for introducing the subject of the slot machine is displayed, there is a possibility that the game intention may be significantly reduced. It is preferable to change the order of Note that the order of replacement is not limited to this.

  In another embodiment, the time for which the alerting image is continuously displayed during the game standby time is less than 3000 ms, but if it is necessary to impress that the player who is about to start the game can not get into it in advance, 3000 ms. The display may be continued as above.

  In the other embodiments, the position and the size of the alerting image displayed during the game standby are the same as the position and the size when displayed at the end of the special game, but the display position and the size are status It may be changed by For example, as shown in FIG. 80, when a warning image is constantly displayed during game standby, it may be displayed smaller at the upper right corner than the center of the image display device 41. This is a device for preventing an excessive warning from being generated because the time for which the warning image is displayed is extended. In addition, the position and magnitude | size which are displayed are not restricted to this.

  In another embodiment, even if an error occurs between the time when the start lever 32 is operated and the rotation of all the reels 21 is stopped, the game is not progressed until the rotation of all the reels is stopped. However, the progress of the game may not be stopped until the gaming medals to be awarded are added or actually paid out as the number of credits (except when the gaming medals are not awarded).

  In another embodiment, when an error occurs between the time when the start lever 32 is operated and the rotation of all the reels 21 is stopped, the error display is displayed on the image display device 41 when the progress of the game is stopped. Although an error image may be displayed when an error occurs. As a result, a game clerk can rush in, and the error can be canceled immediately after the progress of the game is stopped.

  In another embodiment, when an error occurs between the time when the start lever 32 is operated and the rotation of all the reels 21 is stopped, the minimum game time (4100 ms) is maintained even while the progress of the game is stopped. Although the measurement is performed, the measurement of the minimum game time may be stopped. Thus, as long as the player plays the game in the shortest time, the alerting image is not continuously displayed even after the operation of the stop button 33 is activated, and the player does not feel uncomfortable.

  In another embodiment, if an error occurs between the time when the start lever 32 is operated and the rotation of all the reels 21 is stopped, the predetermined time is set regardless of the time taken to clear the error. ((3000 ms or more, 3210 ms or less) continues to display the alerting image, but the time to continue displaying the alerting image may be shortened by the time spent to clear the error or the time corresponding to that time. Good. For example, when it takes 60000 ms or more to clear the error, the alerting image may be continuously displayed for 1000 ms.

  In another embodiment, when an error occurs under the situation where the warning image is displayed at the end of the special game, the error image is displayed superimposed on the warning image, but the warning image is not displayed. An error image may be displayed. Then, when the error is canceled, the error image may be hidden and the alerting image may be displayed. This is suitable when it is desired to make the error image and the alerting image have the same priority.

  In another embodiment, when an error occurs under a situation where a warning image is displayed at the end of the special game, the time during which the error image is continuously displayed (the time spent until the error is canceled) The warning image is displayed continuously for a predetermined time (3000 ms or more and 3210 ms or less), but the time during which the error image is continuously displayed (the time spent until the error is canceled) is not included. In addition, the alerting image may be displayed continuously for a predetermined time (3000 ms or more and 3210 ms or less). Since it is sufficient to continue displaying the alerting image for a predetermined time (more than 3000 ms and less than 3210 ms) regardless of whether the error image is displayed (whether or not an error occurs), the sub control means 200 It is not necessary to increase the burden of

  In another embodiment, if an error occurs under the situation where the alerting image is displayed at the end of the special game, include the time that has been displayed before displaying the error image (error occurs) However, it is possible not to include the time that has been displayed before displaying the error image (an error occurs). This is suitable in the case where the player's consciousness is likely to deviate from the alerting image by displaying the error image.

  In another embodiment, when an error occurs under the condition where the alerting image is displayed at the end of the special game, the measurement of the minimum game time (4100 ms) is performed even while the progress of the game is stopped. However, the measurement of the minimum game time may be stopped. As a result, as long as the player plays the game in the shortest time, the alerting image will not continue to be displayed even after the operation of the stop switch is enabled, and the player will not feel uncomfortable.

  In another embodiment, when an error occurs under the situation where the alerting image is displayed at the end of the special game, the priority of the error image is set higher than that of the alerting image, but the priority of the alerting image is May be set higher than the error image. However, it is not preferable that the type of error that occurred can not be identified by the alerting image, so it is preferable to set the position where the alerting image is displayed to a position where the type of error that occurred does not overlap . In addition, as long as the type of the generated error can be specified, it may be overlapped.

  Also, in this case, a predetermined time (3000 ms or more and 3210 ms or less) continues to display the alerting image, including the time during which the error image is continuously displayed (the time spent until the error is canceled). You may do so.

  In another embodiment, when the supply of power is stopped under the situation where the alerting image is displayed at the end of the special game, the time that has been displayed before the supply of power is stopped is included. However, it is possible not to include the time that has been displayed before the power supply has stopped. This is suitable in the case where there is a high possibility that the player's consciousness deviates from the alerting image because the supply of power is stopped.

  In the other embodiments, the image display device 41 is activated (restarting display) as soon as power supply is resumed, but power may also be supplied when using the image display device 41 which takes a long time to start up. The alerting image may be kept displayed for a predetermined time (3000 ms or more and 3210 ms or less), including the time that has been displayed before the stop. Depending on the time until activation, the alert image will continue to be displayed even after the operation of the stop button 33 is enabled, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable, but the alert image is displayed. It is because there is a slight possibility that the effect expected as the anti-glare measure can not be exhibited if the time for which the operation is continued is shortened. However, if there is a possibility of giving the player a great sense of discomfort, the time for which the alert image is kept displayed may be shortened by the time until activation or the time corresponding to that time. Note that the time that has been displayed before the supply of power stops may not be included.

  In another embodiment, when a gaming medal is awarded, the gaming medal is inserted after the gaming medal to be awarded is added or actually paid out as the number of credits, and then the gaming medal is inserted (the bet button 31 is operated and inserted from the insertion slot 51). The menu screen is displayed on the image display device 41 when the sub operation switch (effect switch) 45 is operated before the start, but regardless of whether or not the game medal is awarded, the start lever If the sub operation switch 45 is operated before the operation 32 is performed, a menu screen may be displayed on the image display device 41.

  In another embodiment, the position at which the alert image is displayed is such that when the menu screen is displayed, the item being selected can be identified, but the item being selected can not be identified. May be By doing this, it is possible to suppress that the player's consciousness deviates from the alerting image.

  In another embodiment, as shown in FIG. 76 and FIG. 77, although the alerting image continues to be displayed, the operation of the start lever 32 etc. is effective (the game proceeds), but the alerting image You may freeze while the is still displayed. In other words, the operation of the start lever 32 or the like may be invalidated (the progress of the game may be stopped). Although this will give the player a sense of discomfort, it is possible to maximize the effect expected as a measure against depression. Specifically, since the progress of the game is stopped for a long time, it is possible to lower the game intention to some extent. It is appropriate that the time for which the alerting image in this case continues to be displayed is a time at which the gaming intention can be reduced to some extent. However, if it is too long (for example, it is time longer than the minimum game time), there is a possibility that the player will not play again. Therefore, it is preferable that it is 3000 ms or more and less than 4100 ms.

  In the case of freezing, as shown in FIG. 81, after the end screen is displayed on the image display device 41, the end screen may be hidden and only the alerting image may be displayed. By displaying only the alerting image, the player's awareness can be directed to the alerting image with certainty, so that the effect expected as an intruding measure can be further exhibited. In addition, after a predetermined time (a predetermined time of 3000 ms or more and less than 4100) elapses after displaying the alerting image, the alerting image is not displayed and the end screen is displayed again. You may keep displaying only the alerting image.

  First, during the game standby time, it is displayed in the order of FIG. 78 (b), FIG. 78 (a), and FIG. 78 (c), and then at the time of FIG. (B) may be displayed continuously. This eliminates the need for preparing an image for displaying FIG. 81 (b).

  In the other embodiments, the alert display is performed by the image display device 41. However, the alert display may be performed by other than the image display device 41. For example, the alerting image may be displayed on the panel portion of the housing located at a position easily recognizable by the player.

  The alert image is not limited to the illustrated one. For example, it may be an image clearly stating that "Pachinko / Pachislot is a modestly enjoyable game. Be careful with the entrapment." Or "Let's be careful with the entrapment.

  Note that the color and font of the characters are free as long as they are difficult for the player to recognize. For example, if the color is similar to the background image at the time of displaying the alert image, it may be difficult for the player to recognize. Therefore, it is preferable that the color is different from the color that occupies most of the background image. In particular, it is preferable to use a color that is located diametrically opposite in the hue circle (hereinafter, also referred to as "opposite color") or a color that is close to the opposite color, because the color is noticeable.

  In the other embodiments, the maximum amount of eight game medals awarded during the special game is taken as an example to calculate the appropriate time to continue displaying the alerting image, but it is awarded during the special game. Even when the number of game medals is at most 8 and at most 15, it is preferable that the appropriate time for continuing displaying the alerting image is at least 3000 ms and at most 3210 ms. Certainly, when 15 game medals are awarded, the time spent is about 280 ms longer than when 8 game medals are awarded, so it is appropriate to keep displaying the alerting image for that amount By shortening the time, it is possible to hide the alerting image before the operation of the stop lever 32 becomes effective. However, it can be said that the probability of the player noticing the warning image is extremely low even if the warning image is not displayed about 280 ms after the operation of the stop lever 32 is activated. In this case, the longer the time is, the more the time expected to continue displaying the alerting image is preferably 3000 ms or more and 3210 ms or less.

(Main effect)
The main effects of the gaming machine (slot machine 1) according to the present embodiment will be summarized below. First, in the image ROM 440, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment divides and manages the pushing order image (first image) and the decoration image (second image) displayed on the screen when notifying the pushing order. Therefore, by displaying the images by reading out the respective images, it is possible to increase variations of the images when notifying the pressing order and to reduce the storage capacity of these images in the image ROM 440. Also, when drawing a high priority image (first image) like a push order image, an image with a lower priority (a second image such as a decoration image, a character, a background, etc.) is used. Specifically, the first image is expanded later than the second image when expanded in the frame buffer of the video RAM 430 (in order to draw the first image in the drawing command list) Can be prevented from being displayed, for example, when an image having a high priority is not displayed, by arranging the command of (1) to be positioned behind the command for drawing the second image.

  It should be noted that the player is urged to operate when the player does not operate the stop buttons 33a to 33c even though notification of occurrence of an error (error) or that the reels 21a to 21c have started to rotate and a predetermined time has elapsed. When the notification is displayed on the image display device 41, it is desirable that the drawing order of the push-sequenced image (first image) be determined according to the display order of the display contents. For example, since the error image has a higher priority than the push order image, the drawing command list is generated so that the expansion to the frame buffer is later than the push order image. In addition, since the images prompting the operation of the stop buttons 33a to 33c have higher priority than the order-of-pushed images, the drawing command list is set so that the image for prompting the operation is later than the order-pressed images. Generate With such a configuration, important images can be displayed on the image display device 41 without fail.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the internal gaming control means 162 on the main control means 100 side decides and manages the execution of the AT game. Then, when the winning order bell or the pressing order replay is won and the pressing order is notified, first, the main control means 100 notifies the obtained number indicator 72 which is the main display, and the pressing order is pressed by the control command. The order is notified to the sub control means 200, and based on this control command, the sub control board 300 and the image control board 400 are configured to display and notify the pressing order on the image display device 41. The information on the winning combination notifying the pressing order transmitted from the main control unit 100 to the sub-control unit 200 is not the condition device number but the condition device number, an instruction number indicating the pressing order, and the type thereof. Since it is transmitted by masking to the effect group number to be shown, even if it is known from the effect group number, the kind of winning combination (for example, whether it is a re-playing combination-A or a winning combination-A1 to A6), You can not know the correct order. With the above configuration, when an incorrect instruction number is transmitted from the main control unit 100, or an instruction corresponding to an instruction number different from the instruction number received by the secondary control unit 200 from the main control unit 100 is selected. Even in the case where the player has made an instruction, since the instruction display is already performed by the acquired number display 72, the player notices that the instruction display is different between the main control unit 100 and the sub control unit 200. Even in such a case, if the instruction display by the winning number display 72 is followed, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged. The sub control means 200 is provided not only with notification of the order of pressing by the image display device 41, but also with notification means (second indicator) using the effect lamp 42 and the like to notify the order of pressing. You may According to this configuration, even when the image display device 41 can not notify the pressing order, the notification can be issued by the sub-display on the side of the sub control unit 200.

  In addition, the content described as a structure of each embodiment mentioned above, its modification, further improvement of a modification can be combined suitably. Also, the described effects only describe the most preferable effects resulting from the present invention, and are not limited thereto.

  Further, the present invention has been described by taking a slot machine (roll-type game machine) installed in a pachinko store etc. as an example, but a pachinko game installed in a pachinko store etc, a jing ball game machine, an arrange ball gaming machine The present invention is applicable to casino machines including slot machines installed in casinos.

1 Slot machine (game machine)
21a to 21c Reel 33a to 33c Stop button 41 Image display device (image display means)
72 Acquisition number display (pushing order notification means)
100 Main control means 200 Secondary control means

Claims (2)

Main control means for controlling the progress of the game;
Secondary control means for controlling the execution of the effect;
With multiple reels with a symbol,
With multiple stop buttons,
Operation order notification means;
Image display means, and
The main control means, under a predetermined situation, operates the stop button in a predetermined operation sequence, and when the combination of predetermined symbols is won and displayed, the information related to the predetermined operation sequence is selected. Displayed on the operation order notification means,
The sub-control means
Under the predetermined situation, when the predetermined combination is won, information on a predetermined operation order is displayed on the image display means.
Information is displayed on the image display means for prompting the user to stop the rotation of the reel when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
When displaying information prompting the user to stop the rotation of the reel under the condition where information on a predetermined operation order is displayed on the image display means, at least a portion of the information on the predetermined operation order is displayed. Display overlapping information to prompt you to stop the reel rotation,
The information for prompting the user to stop the rotation of the reel repeats display / non-display.   When the sub-control means is displaying on the image display means information for prompting the user to stop the rotation of the reel, if the specific condition different from the operation of the stop button is satisfied, the sub-control means 2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein information prompting to stop rotation is not displayed.